Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe инструкция обслуживания

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578

Идти на страницу of

Хорошее руководство по эксплуатации

Законодательство обязывает продавца передать покупателю, вместе с товаром, руководство по эксплуатации Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe. Отсутствие инструкции либо неправильная информация, переданная потребителю, составляют основание для рекламации в связи с несоответствием устройства с договором. В законодательстве допускается предоставлении руководства в другой, чем бумажная форме, что, в последнее время, часто используется, предоставляя графическую или электронную форму инструкции Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe или обучающее видео для пользователей. Условием остается четкая и понятная форма.

Что такое руководство?

Слово происходит от латинского "instructio", тоесть привести в порядок. Следовательно в инструкции Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe можно найти описание этапов поведения. Цель инструкции заключается в облегчении запуска, использования оборудования либо выполнения определенной деятельности. Инструкция является набором информации о предмете/услуге, подсказкой.

К сожалению немного пользователей находит время для чтения инструкций Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe, и хорошая инструкция позволяет не только узнать ряд дополнительных функций приобретенного устройства, но и позволяет избежать возникновения большинства поломок.

Из чего должно состоять идеальное руководство по эксплуатации?

Прежде всего в инструкции Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe должна находится:
- информация относительно технических данных устройства Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe
- название производителя и год производства оборудования Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe
- правила обслуживания, настройки и ухода за оборудованием Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe
- знаки безопасности и сертификаты, подтверждающие соответствие стандартам

Почему мы не читаем инструкций?

Как правило из-за нехватки времени и уверенности в отдельных функциональностях приобретенных устройств. К сожалению само подсоединение и запуск Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe это слишком мало. Инструкция заключает ряд отдельных указаний, касающихся функциональности, принципов безопасности, способов ухода (даже то, какие средства стоит использовать), возможных поломок Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe и способов решения проблем, возникающих во время использования. И наконец то, в инструкции можно найти адресные данные сайта Chevrolet, в случае отсутствия эффективности предлагаемых решений. Сейчас очень большой популярностью пользуются инструкции в форме интересных анимаций или видео материалов, которое лучше, чем брошюра воспринимаются пользователем. Такой вид инструкции позволяет пользователю просмотреть весь фильм, не пропуская спецификацию и сложные технические описания Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe, как это часто бывает в случае бумажной версии.

Почему стоит читать инструкции?

Прежде всего здесь мы найдем ответы касательно конструкции, возможностей устройства Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe, использования отдельных аксессуаров и ряд информации, позволяющей вполне использовать все функции и упрощения.

После удачной покупки оборудования/устройства стоит посвятить несколько минут для ознакомления с каждой частью инструкции Chevrolet 2009 Tahoe. Сейчас их старательно готовят или переводят, чтобы они были не только понятными для пользователя, но и чтобы выполняли свою основную информационно-поддерживающую функцию.

Содержание руководства

  • Страница 1

    Seats and Restraint System ............................. 1 - 1 Head Restraints ......................................... 1 - 2 Front Seats ............................................... 1 - 4 Rear Seats .............................................. 1-14 Safety Belts ............................................. 1-32 Child Restraints ....................................... 1-54 Airbag System ......................................... 1-81 Restraint System Check ............................ 1-98 Features and Controls ..................................... 2 - 1 Keys ........................................................ 2 - 3 Doors and Locks ...................................... 2-10 Window[...]

  • Страница 2

    Appearance Care ................................... 5-106 Vehicle Identification ............................... 5-114 Electrical System .................................... 5-114 Capacities and Specifications ................... 5-122 Maintenance Schedule ..................................... 6 - 1 Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6 - 2 Customer Assistance Information .................... 7 - 1 Customer Assistance and Information ........... 7 - 2 Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14 Vehicle Data Recording and Privacy ........... 7-16 Index ................................................................ 1[...]

  • Страница 3

    GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, CHEVROLET, the CHEVROLET Emblem, and the names TAHOE, SUBURBAN, and Z71 are registered trademarks of General Motors Corporation. This manual includes the latest information at the time it was printed. GM reserves the right to make changes in the product after that time without notice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General Motors of Canada Limited” for Chevrolet Motor Division wherever it appears in this manual. This manual describes features that may or may not be on your specific vehicle. Read this manual from beginning to end to learn about the vehicle’s features and controls. Pictures, symbols, and words work together to[...]

  • Страница 4

    Index To quickly locate information about the vehicle, use the index in the back of the manual. It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and the page number where it can be found. Safety Warnings and Symbols A circle with a slash through it is a safety symbol which means “Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or “Do not let this happen.” A box with the word CAUTION is used to tell about things that could hurt you or others if you were to ignore the warning. { CAUTION: These mean there is something that could hurt you or other people. Cautions tell what the hazard is and what to do to avoid or reduce the hazard. Read these cautions. A notice tells about something that can damage t[...]

  • Страница 5

    Vehicle Symbol Chart Here are some additional symbols that may be found on the vehicle and what they mean. For more information on the symbol, refer to the index. 0 : Adjustable Pedals 9 : Airbag Readiness Light # : Air Conditioning ! : Antilock Brake System (ABS) g : Audio Steering Wheel Controls or OnStar ® $ : Brake System Warning Light " : Charging System I : Cruise Control B : Engine Coolant Temperature O : Exterior Lamps # : Fog Lamps . : Fuel Gage + : Fuses i : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer j : LATCH System Child Restraints * : Malfunction Indicator Lamp : : Oil Pressure g : Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors } : Power / : Remote Vehicle Start > : Safety Belt Reminders 7 : Tire [...]

  • Страница 6

    ✍ NOTES vi[...]

  • Страница 7

    Head Restraints .............................................. .1-2 Front Seats ..................................................... .1-4 Manual Seats ............................................... .1-4 Power Seats ................................................. .1-5 Manual Lumbar ............................................. .1-6 P o w e r L u m b a r .............................................. .1-6 Heated Seats ................................................ .1-7 Heated and Cooled Seats ............................... .1-8 Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals ................... .1-8 Reclining Seatbacks ..................................... .1-10 Center Seat ...........................[...]

  • Страница 8

    Head Restraints The front seats have adjustable head restraints in the outboard seating positions. { CAUTION: With head restraints that are not installed and adjusted properly, there is a greater chance that occupants will suffer a neck/spinal injury in a crash. Do not drive until the head restraints for all occupants are installed and adjusted properly. Adjust the head restraint so that the top of the restraint is at the same height as the top of the occupant’s head. This position reduces the chance of a neck injury in a crash. 1-2[...]

  • Страница 9

    Pull the head restraint up to raise it. To lower the head restraint, press the button, located on the top of the seatback, and push the restraint down. Push down on the head restraint after the button is released to make sure that it is locked in place. The head restraints are not designed to be removed. The rear seat has head rests that can be adjusted up and down. 1-3[...]

  • Страница 10

    Front Seats Manual Seats { CAUTION: You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle is moving. The sudden movement could startle and confuse you, or make you push a pedal when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s seat only when the vehicle is not moving. If the vehicle has a manual seat, it can be moved forward or rearward. 1. Lift the bar to unlock the seat. 2. Slide the seat to the desired position and release the bar. Try to move the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked in place. 1-4[...]

  • Страница 11

    Power Seats On a vehicle with power seats, the controls used to operate them are located on the outboard side of the seats. Move the seat forward or rearward by sliding the control forward or rearward. Your vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle’s power seat: • Raise or lower the front part of the seat cushion by moving the front of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the rear part of the seat cushion by moving the rear of the control up or down. • Raise or lower the entire seat by moving the entire control up or down. On seats with power reclining seatbacks, the control is located behind the power seat control on the outboard side of the seats. See “Power[...]

  • Страница 12

    Manual Lumbar On vehicles with this feature the control is located on the outboard side of the seat. Increase or decrease lumbar support by turning the knob forward or rearward. Power Lumbar On seats with power lumbar, the controls used to operate this feature are located on the outboard side of the seats. • To increase lumbar support, press and hold the front of the control. • To decrease lumbar support, press and hold the rear of the control. 1-6[...]

  • Страница 13

    The vehicle may have additional features to adjust your vehicle’s power seat: • To raise the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the top of the control. • To lower the height of the lumbar support, press and hold the bottom of the control. Release the control when the lower seatback reaches the desired level of lumbar support. Your vehicle may have a memory function which allows seat settings to be saved and recalled. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information. Keep in mind that as your seating position changes, as it may during long trips, so should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the seat as needed. Heated Seats On vehicles with heated [...]

  • Страница 14

    Heated and Cooled Seats If the front seats have the heated and cooled seat feature, the buttons used to control this feature are located on the front doors near the door handle. { (Cooled Seat): To cool the entire seat, press the button with the cooled seat symbol. This symbol will appear on the climate control display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low and to turn the cooled seat off. Indicator bars next to the symbol designate the level of cooling selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. + (Heated Seatback): To heat only the seatback, press the button with the heated seatback symbol. This[...]

  • Страница 15

    To save seating positions in memory: 1. Adjust the driver’s seat, including the seatback recliner and lumbar, both outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake pedals to a comfortable position. See Outside Power Mirrors on page 2-53 and Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal on page 2-30 for more information. Not all mirrors, adjustable throttles and brake pedals, or power lumbar will have the ability to save and recall their positions. 2. Press and hold button 1 until two beeps sound to indicate that the position has been stored. A second seating, lumbar, mirror, and throttle and brake pedal position can be programmed by repeating the above steps and pressing button 2. To recall the memory po[...]

  • Страница 16

    Easy Exit Seat The control for this feature is located on the driver’s door panel between buttons 1 and 2. With the vehicle in PARK (P), the driver’s seat exit position can be recalled by pressing the exit button. You will hear a single beep, and the driver’s seat will move back. If the easy exit seat feature is programmed in the Driver Information Center (DIC), automatic seat movement will occur when the key is removed from the ignition. See “EASY EXIT SEAT” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information. The memory seat and easy exit features can also be programmed using the DIC. For programming information, see DIC Vehicle Customization (Wit[...]

  • Страница 17

    { CAUTION: Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their job when you are reclined like this. The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash, you could go into it, receiving neck or other injuries. The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash the belt could go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. For proper protection when the vehicle is in motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit well back in the seat and wear your safety belt properly. 1-11[...]

  • Страница 18

    Manual Reclining Seatbacks On seats with manual reclining seatbacks, the lever used to operate them is located on the outboard side of the seat(s). To recline the seatback: 1. Lift the recline lever. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. 2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1-12[...]

  • Страница 19

    Power Reclining Seatbacks If the seats have power reclining seatbacks, the control used to recline them is located on the outboard side of the seat behind the power seat control. • To recline the seatback, tilt the top of the control rearward. • To bring the seatback forward, tilt the top of the control forward. Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving. Center Seat Your vehicle may have a front center seat. The seatback doubles as an armrest and cupholder/storage area for the driver and passenger when the center seat is not used. Do not use it as a seating position when the seatback is folded down. 1-13[...]

  • Страница 20

    Rear Seats Heated Seats On vehicles with rear outboard heated seats, the buttons used to control this feature are located on the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) panel. M (Heated Seat): To heat the seat cushion, press the button with the heated seat symbol. A heated seat symbol will be shown in the RSA display to indicate that the feature is on. Press the button to cycle through the temperature settings of high, medium, and low, and to turn it off. Indicator bars next to the symbol will designate the level of heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and one for low. The heated seats are off when the ignition is of f. 60/40 Split Bench Seat (Second Row) If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the[...]

  • Страница 21

    Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the seat, to release the seatback. The seatback will fold forward automatically. Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatb[...]

  • Страница 22

    3. Lift the same lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly r[...]

  • Страница 23

    Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third rows, if your vehicle has them, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before [...]

  • Страница 24

    Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature to work. Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) { CAUTION: Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button. To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before f[...]

  • Страница 25

    Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person weari[...]

  • Страница 26

    Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or Outside { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if your vehicle has them, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their nor[...]

  • Страница 27

    Reclining Seatbacks To recline the seatback, do the following: 1. Lift the lever located on the outboard side of the seat. 2. Move the seatback to the desired position, then release the lever to lock the seatback in place. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. To return the seatback to an upright position, do the following: 1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure to the seatback and the seatback will return to the upright position. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 2. Push and pull on[...]

  • Страница 28

    Manual Fold and Tumble Feature Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rear seat. 2. Lift the lever, located on the outboard side of the seat, to release the seatback. The seatback will fold forward. Leaving the seatback in this position creates a flat load floor. If the seatback cannot fold flat, try moving the front seat forward and/or put the front seatback in the upr[...]

  • Страница 29

    3. Lift the lever again to release the rear of the seat from the floor. The seat will tumble forward. Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. 1-23[...]

  • Страница 30

    Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is folded, or folded and tumbled, could cause injury in a sudden stop or crash. Be sure to return the seat to the passenger seating position. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked into place. To fold and tumble the seat from the third row seats, if your vehicle has them: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before folding a rea[...]

  • Страница 31

    Power Release Fold and Tumble Feature The transmission must be in (P) Park for this feature to work. Folding and Tumbling the Seat(s) { CAUTION: Automatically folding and tumbling the seat when someone is sitting in the seat, could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always make sure there is no one sitting in the seat before pressing the automatic seat release button. To fold and tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Make sure that there is nothing under, in front of, or on the seat. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. Always unbuckle the safety belts and return them to their normal stowed position before f[...]

  • Страница 32

    Returning the Seat(s) to the Sitting Position To return the seat to the sitting position, do the following: 1. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 2. Lift the seatback and push it rearward. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Folding and Tumbling the Second Row Seat(s) from the Third Row Seats or Outside { CAUTION: Using the third row seating position while the second row is f[...]

  • Страница 33

    2. Press the automatic seat release button located on the panel behind the rear doors. One press of the button automatically folds the seatback flat and tumbles the seat forward. There will be a slight delay between the folding of the seatback and the tumbling of the seat. Third Row Seat If the vehicle has a third row seat, the seatback(s) can be folded and the entire seat can be tumbled, or removed from the vehicle. Folding the Seatback(s) To fold the seatback, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Remove all items on the seat cushion. Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safety belts still fastened may cause damage to the seat or the safety belts. [...]

  • Страница 34

    Unfolding the Seatback(s) To return the seatback to the upright position, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Pull up on the seatback until it locks into the upright position. { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. Tumbling the Third Row Seat The seat can be tumbled forward for additional cargo space. To tumble the seat, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Make sure the head re[...]

  • Страница 35

    6. Tilt the seat fully forward to lock it into place. 7. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked. Put the seat in this position only when necessary for additional cargo space. Returning the Third Row Seat from a Tumbled Position To return the seat to the normal seating position, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Make sure there is nothing that could become trapped under the seat. 3. Release the seat from the tumbled position by lifting the lever located next to the carrying handle at the bottom rear of the seat. 4. Pull the seat down until it latches to the floor. The seatback cannot be raised if the seat is not latched to the floor.[...]

  • Страница 36

    Removing the Third Row Seat To remove the seat, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the seat. 2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously. The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback is folded. 3. Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling the carrying handle, located at the rear of the seat, rearward. 4. Roll the seat out of the vehicle. There is a track in the floor to guide the seat wheels out of the vehicle. Installing the Third Row Seat To install the seat, do the following: 1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle. 2. Slide the front outboard seat wheels into the track on the ?[...]

  • Страница 37

    { CAUTION: If either seatback is not locked, it could move forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury to the person sitting there. Always push and pull on the seatbacks to be sure they are locked. 6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is locked. { CAUTION: A safety belt that is improperly routed, not properly attached, or twisted will not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. After raising the rear seatback, always check to be sure that the safety belts are properly routed and attached, and are not twisted. 7. Make sure the safety belts are returned to the original position over the seatbacks. 1-31[...]

  • Страница 38

    Safety Belts Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone This section of the manual describes how to use safety belts properly. It also describes some things not to do with safety belts. { CAUTION: Do not let anyone ride where a safety belt cannot be worn properly. In a crash, if you or your passenger(s) are not wearing safety belts, the injuries can be much worse. You can hit things inside the vehicle harder or be ejected from the vehicle. You and your passenger(s) can be seriously injured or killed. In the same crash, you might not be, if you are buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt, and check that your passenger(s) are restrained properly too. { CAUTION: It is extremely dangerous to ride in[...]

  • Страница 39

    Why Safety Belts Work When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes. Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat on wheels. Put someone on it. 1-33[...]

  • Страница 40

    Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. The rider does not stop. The person keeps going until stopped by something. In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield... 1-34[...]

  • Страница 41

    or the instrument panel... or the safety belts! With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does. You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance, and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why safety belts make such good sense. 1-35[...]

  • Страница 42

    Questions and Answers About Safety Belts Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after a crash if I am wearing a safety belt? A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety belt or not. But your chance of being conscious during and after an accident, so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater if you are belted. And you can unbuckle a safety belt, even if you are upside down. Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to wear safety belts? A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; so they work with safety belts — not instead of them. Whether or not an airbag is provided, all occupants still have to buckle up to get the most protection. That is true not only in frontal collision[...]

  • Страница 43

    How to Wear Safety Belts Properly This section is only for people of adult size. Be aware that there are special things to know about safety belts and children. And there are different rules for smaller children and infants. If a child will be riding in the vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-54 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-57 . Follow those rules for everyone’s protection. It is very important for all occupants to buckle up. Statistics show that unbelted people are hurt more often in crashes than those who are wearing safety belts. Occupants who are not buckled up can be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike others in the vehicle who are wearing safety bel[...]

  • Страница 44

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move forward too much, which could increase injury. The shoulder belt should fit snugly against your body. 1-38[...]

  • Страница 45

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearly as much protection this way. { CAUTION: You can be seriously hurt if your lap belt is too loose. In a crash, you could slide under the lap belt and apply force on your abdomen. This could cause serious or even fatal injuries. The lap belt should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching the thighs. 1-39[...]

  • Страница 46

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is buckled in the wrong buckle. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt is buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash, the belt would go up over your abdomen. The belt forces would be there, not on the pelvic bones. This could cause serious internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you. 1-40[...]

  • Страница 47

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is over an armrest. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if your belt goes over an armrest like this. The belt would be much too high. In a crash, you can slide under the belt. The belt force would then be applied on the abdomen, not on the pelvic bones, and that could cause serious or fatal injuries. Be sure the belt goes under the armrests. 1-41[...]

  • Страница 48

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. It should be worn over the shoulder at all times. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured if you wear the shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your body would move too far forward, which would increase the chance of head and neck injury. Also, the belt would apply too much force to the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder bones. You could also severely injure internal organs like your liver or spleen. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-42[...]

  • Страница 49

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is behind the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, you would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. Your body could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. You might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-43[...]

  • Страница 50

    Q: What is wrong with this? A: The belt is twisted across the body. { CAUTION: You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt. In a crash, you would not have the full width of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt is twisted, make it straight so it can work properly, or ask your dealer/retailer to fix it. 1-44[...]

  • Страница 51

    Lap-Shoulder Belt All seating positions in the vehicle have a lap-shoulder belt except for the center front passenger position, if equipped, which has a lap belt. See Lap Belt on page 1-52 for more information. The lap-shoulder belts for the first and second row seating positions are equipped with free-falling latch plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap-shoulder belts have either free-falling or cinching latch plates. Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate style: The following instructions explain how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly. 1. Adjust the seat, if the seat is adjustable, so you can sit up straight. To see how, see “Seats” in the Index. 2. Pick up[...]

  • Страница 52

    If the shoulder portion of a passenger belt with a free-falling latch plate is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature may be engaged. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. Engaging the child restraint locking feature in the right front seating position may affect the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for more information. If the belt stops before it reaches the buckle, for lap-shoulder belts with cinching latch plates, tilt the latch plate and keep pulling the safety belt until it can be buckled. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into [...]

  • Страница 53

    4. If equipped with a shoulder belt height adjuster, move it to the height that is right for you. See “Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment” later in this section for instructions on use and important safety information. 5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the shoulder belt. It may be necessary to pull stitching on the safety belt through the latch plate to fully tighten the lap belt on smaller occupants. To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle. The belt should return to its stowed position. Before a door is closed, be sure the safety belt is out of the way. If a door is slammed against a safety belt, damage can occur to both the belt and the vehicle. 1-47[...]

  • Страница 54

    Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster The vehicle has a shoulder belt height adjuster for the driver and right front passenger positions. Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion of the belt is centered on the shoulder. The belt should be away from the face and neck, but not falling off the shoulder. Improper shoulder belt height adjustment could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. Squeeze the buttons (A) on the sides of the height adjuster and move the height adjuster to the desired position. The adjuster can be moved up just by pushing up on the shoulder belt guide. After the adjuster is set to the desired position, try to move it down without squeezing the buttons to mak[...]

  • Страница 55

    There is one guide for each outside passenger position in the second row seat and the third row, if the vehicle has one. Here is how to install a comfort guide to the safety belt: 1. For the second row, remove the guide from its storage clip on the interior body. If your vehicle has a third row, remove the guide from its storage pocket on the side of the seat. Second Row Third Row 1-49[...]

  • Страница 56

    2. Place the guide over the belt, and insert the two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide. 3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat. The elastic cord must be under the belt and the guide on top. 1-50[...]

  • Страница 57

    { CAUTION: A safety belt that is not properly worn may not provide the protection needed in a crash. The person wearing the belt could be seriously injured. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of the body are best able to take belt restraining forces. 4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as described previously in this section. Make sure that the shoulder belt crosses the shoulder. To remove and store the comfort guide, squeeze the belt edges together so that the safety belt can be removed from the guide. Slide the guide into its storage clip on the interior body or storage pocket on the side of the seat. 1-51[...]

  • Страница 58

    Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts. A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt, and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible, below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy. The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making safety belts effective is wearing them properly. Lap Belt This part is only for the lap belt. To learn how to wear a lap-shoulder belt, see Lap-Sho[...]

  • Страница 59

    To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown until the belt is snug. If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-53 . Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt quickly if necessary. If you find that the latch plate will not go fully into the buckle, see if you are using the correct buckle. Be sure that the latch plate clicks when inserted into the buckle. Safety Belt Extender If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you, you should use it. But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer/retailer will order you an extender. When you go in to order it, take the heaviest coat you will w[...]

  • Страница 60

    Child Restraints Older Children Older children who have outgrown booster seats should wear the vehicle’s safety belts. The manufacturer’s instructions that come with the booster seat, state the weight and height limitations for that booster. Use a booster seat with a lap-shoulder belt until the child passes the below fit test: • Sit all the way back on the seat. Do the knees bend at the seat edge? If yes, continue. If no, return to the booster seat. • Buckle the lap-shoulder belt. Does the shoulder belt rest on the shoulder? If yes, continue. If no, try using the rear safety belt comfort guide. See “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-45 for more i[...]

  • Страница 61

    Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts? A: An older child should wear a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt should not cross the face or neck. The lap belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching the top of the thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s pelvic bones in a crash. It should never be worn over the abdomen, which could cause severe or even fatal internal injuries in a crash. Also see “Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 1-45 . According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front s[...]

  • Страница 62

    { CAUTION: Never do this. Never allow a child to wear the safety belt with the shoulder belt behind their back. A child can be seriously injured by not wearing the lap-shoulder belt properly. In a crash, the child would not be restrained by the shoulder belt. The child could move too far forward increasing the chance of head and neck injury. The child might also slide under the lap belt. The belt force would then be applied right on the abdomen. That could cause serious or fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over the shoulder and across the chest. 1-56[...]

  • Страница 63

    Infants and Young Children Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes infants and all other children. Neither the distance traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In fact, the law in every state in the United States and in every Canadian province says children up to some age must be restrained while in a vehicle. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Never leave children unattended in a vehicle and never allow children to play with the safety belts. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults a[...]

  • Страница 64

    { CAUTION: Never do this. Never hold an infant or a child while riding in a vehicle. Due to crash forces, an infant or a child will become so heavy it is not possible to hold it during a crash. For example, in a crash at only 40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb) infant will suddenly become a 110 kg (240 lb) force on a person’s arms. An infant should be secured in an appropriate restraint. 1-58[...]

  • Страница 65

    { CAUTION: Never do this. Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Never put a rear-facing child restraint in the right front seat. Secure a rear-facing child restraint in a rear seat. It is also better to secure a forward-facing child restraint in a rear seat. If you must secure a forward-facing child restraint in the right front seat, always move the front passenger seat as far back as it will go. 1-59[...]

  • Страница 66

    Q: What are the different types of add-on child restraints? A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types. Selection of a particular restraint should take into consideration not only the child’s weight, height, and age but also whether or not the restraint will be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it will be used. For most basic types of child restraints, there are many different models available. When purchasing a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will have a label saying that it meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. The restraint manufacturer’s ins[...]

  • Страница 67

    { CAUTION: A young child’s hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s regular safety belt may not remain low on the hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash, the belt would apply force on a body area that is unprotected by any bony structure. This alone could cause serious or fatal injuries. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, young children should always be secured in appropriate child restraints. Child Restraint Systems A rear-facing infant seat (A) provides restraint with the seating surface against the back of the infant. The harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash, acts to keep the i[...]

  • Страница 68

    A booster seat (C-D) is a child restraint designed to improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system. A booster seat can also help a child to see out the window. Securing an Add-On Child Restraint in the Vehicle { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child restraint is not properly secured in the vehicle. Secure the child restraint properly in the vehicle using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH system, following the instructions that came with that child restraint and the instructions in this manual. To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems must be secured in vehicle seats by l[...]

  • Страница 69

    When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the instructions that come with the restraint which may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this manual. The child restraint instructions are important, so if they are not available, obtain a replacement copy from the manufacturer. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in the vehicle — even when no child is in it. Securing the Child Within the Child Restraint { CAUTION: A child can be seriously injured or killed in a crash if the child is not properly secured in the child restraint. [...]

  • Страница 70

    A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-s[...]

  • Страница 71

    When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with your child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. Wherever a child restraint is installed, be sure to secure the child restraint properly. Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no child is in it. Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) The LATCH system holds a child restraint during driving or in a crash. This system is designed to make installation of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses anchor[...]

  • Страница 72

    Lower Anchors Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle. There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating position that will accommodate a child restraint with lower attachments (B). Top Tether Anchor A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation of the child restraint during driving or in a crash. Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B) to secure the top tether to the anchor. [...]

  • Страница 73

    Some child restraints with top tethers are designed for use with or without the top tether being attached. Others require the top tether always to be attached. In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for your child restraint. If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints. Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not a kit is available. Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor Locations j (Lower Anchor): Seating positions with two lower anchors. i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors[...]

  • Страница 74

    i (Top Tether Anchor): Seating positions with top tether anchors. There is one top tether anchor that can be used for either the third row center or driver side seating position but not both at the same time. For models with a three passenger third row seat, see the information following for installing a child restraint with a top tether in the third row, if your vehicle has one. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor. For models with 60/40 second row seating, the rear right side passenger and center seating positions have exposed metal anchors located in the crease between the seatback and the seat cushion. For models with second row bucket seats, both rear seating p[...]

  • Страница 75

    For models with 60/40 second row seating, the top tether anchors are located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating position where the child restraint will be placed. For vehicles with a two passenger third row seat, there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can be used for the rear driver side seating position in the third row. Never install two top tethers using the same top tether anchor. For vehicles with a three passenger third row seat, there is one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion that can [...]

  • Страница 76

    Do not secure a child restraint in a position without a top tether anchor if a national or local law requires that the top tether be attached, or if the instructions that come with the child restraint say that the top tether must be attached. According to accident statistics, children and infants are safer when properly restrained in a child restraint system or infant restraint system secured in a rear seating position. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-63 for additional information. Securing a Child Restraint Designed for the LATCH System { CAUTION: If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached to anchors, the child restraint will not be able to protect the child correctly. In a cr[...]

  • Страница 77

    { CAUTION: Do not attach more than one child restraint to a single anchor. Attaching more than one child restraint to a single anchor could cause the anchor or attachment to come loose or even break during a crash. A child or others could be injured. To reduce the risk of serious or fatal injuries during a crash, attach only one child restraint per anchor. { CAUTION: Children can be seriously injured or strangled if a shoulder belt is wrapped around their neck and the safety belt continues to tighten. Buckle any unused safety belts behind the child restraint so children cannot reach them. Pull the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock, if your vehicle has one, after [...]

  • Страница 78

    2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten the top tether to the top tether anchor, if the vehicle has one. Refer to the child restraint instructions and the following steps: 2.1. Find the top tether anchor. 2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether according to your child restraint instructions and the following instructions: If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you are using does not have a headrest or head restraint and you are using a dual tether, route the tether over the seatback. If the position you ar[...]

  • Страница 79

    If the position you are using has an adjustable headrest or head restraint and you are using a single tether, raise the headrest or head restraint and route the tether under the headrest or head restraint and in between the headrest or head restraint posts. 3. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat Position When securing a child restraint in a rear seating position, study the instructions that came with the child restraint to make sure it is compatible with this vehicle. If the child restraint has the LATCH system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65 for how and where to install [...]

  • Страница 80

    If more than one child restraint needs to be installed in the rear seat, be sure to read Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-63 . The vehicle’s lap-shoulder belts for the first and second row seating positions are equipped with free-falling latch plates. If the vehicle has a third row, the lap-shoulder belts have either free-falling or cinching latch plates. Use the following pictures to determine the latch plate style: 1. Put the child restraint on the seat. 2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the restraint. The child restraint instructions will show you how. Free-Falling Latch Plate Cinching Latch Plate 1-74[...]

  • Страница 81

    For third row seating positions, with cinching latch plates, tilt the latch plate to adjust the belt if needed. 3. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks. Position the release button on the buckle so that the safety belt could be quickly unbuckled if necessary. 1-75[...]

  • Страница 82

    4. For passenger seating positions with a lap-shoulder belt and a free-falling latch plate, pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. When installing a child restraint using a lap-shoulder belt and a cinching latch plate, skip Step 4 and proceed to Step 5. 5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 1-76[...]

  • Страница 83

    6. If the child restraint has a top tether, follow the child restraint manufacturer’s instructions regarding the use of the top tether. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 1-65 for more information. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. If the top tether is attached to a top tether anchor, disconnect it. Securing a Child Restraint in the Center Front Seat Position { CAUTION: A child in a child restraint in the center front seat can be badly injured or killed by the frontal airbags if they inflate. Never secure a ch[...]

  • Страница 84

    A label on the sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys. { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-sa[...]

  • Страница 85

    In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether be attached. You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the child restraint in this position. Follow the instructions that came with the child restraint. 1. Move the seat as far back as it will go before securing the forward-facing child restraint. When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator on the passenger airbag status indicator should light and stay lit when the vehicle is started. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-38 . 2. Put the child restraint on the seat. 3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the la[...]

  • Страница 86

    5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of the retractor to set the lock. 6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the shoulder belt back into the retractor. When installing a forward-facing child restraint, it may be helpful to use your knee to push down on the child restraint as you tighten the belt. 7. Push and pull the child restraint in different directions to be sure it is secure. 1-80[...]

  • Страница 87

    If the airbag is off, the of f indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator will come on and stay on when the vehicle is started. If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit, see “If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint” under Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for more information. To remove the child restraint, unbuckle the vehicle safety belt and let it return to the stowed position. Airbag System The vehicle has the following airbags: • A frontal airbag for the driver. • A frontal airbag for the right front passenger. The vehicle may have the following airbags: • A roof-rail airbag for the driver and passenger directly behind the driver[...]

  • Страница 88

    Airbags are designed to supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Even though today’s airbags are also designed to help reduce the risk of injury from the force of an inflating bag, all airbags must inflate very quickly to do their job. Here are the most important things to know about the airbag system: { CAUTION: You can be severely injured or killed in a crash if you are not wearing your safety belt — even if you have airbags. Airbags are designed to work with safety belts, but do not replace them. Also, airbags are not designed to deploy in every crash. In some crashes safety belts are your only restraint. See When Should an Airbag Inflate? on page 1-86 . Wearing your saf[...]

  • Страница 89

    { CAUTION: Children who are up against, or very close to, any airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer protection for adults and older children, but not for young children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag system is designed for them. Young children and infants need the protection that a child restraint system can provide. Always secure children properly in your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children on page 1-54 or Infants and Young Children on page 1-57 . There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The system checks the airbag electrical sy[...]

  • Страница 90

    The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the instrument panel on the passenger’s side. If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags for the driver, right front passenger, and second row outboard passengers, they are in the ceiling above the side windows. Driver Side shown, Passenger Side similar 1-84[...]

  • Страница 91

    If your vehicle has roof-rail airbags and a third row passenger seat, the airbags are located in the ceiling above the rear windows for the outboard passenger positions in the third row. { CAUTION: If something is between an occupant and an airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly or it might force the object into that person causing severe injury or even death. The path of an inflating airbag must be kept clear. Do not put anything between an occupant and an airbag, and do not attach or put anything on the steering wheel hub or on or near any other airbag covering. Never secure anything to the roof of a vehicle with roof-rail airbags by routing a rope or tie down through any door or [...]

  • Страница 92

    When Should an Airbag Inflate? Frontal airbags are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontal crashes to help reduce the potential for severe injuries mainly to the driver’s or right front passenger’s head and chest. However, they are only designed to inflate if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment threshold. Deployment thresholds are used to predict how severe a crash is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags will or should deploy is not based on how fast your vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly your vehicle slows d[...]

  • Страница 93

    Your vehicle has a seat position sensor which enables the sensing system to monitor the position of the driver’s seat. The seat position sensor provides information that is used to determine if the airbags should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment. Your vehicle may or may not have roof-rail airbags. See Airbag System on page 1-81 . Roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side crashes. In addition, these roof-rail airbags are intended to inflate during a rollover or in a severe frontal impact. Roof-rail airbags will inflate if the crash severity is above the system’s designed threshold level. The threshold level can vary with specific vehicle desig[...]

  • Страница 94

    How Does an Airbag Restrain? In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions, even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side collisions, even belted occupants can contact the inside of the vehicle. Airbags supplement the protection provided by safety belts. Frontal airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually. Roof-rail airbags distribute the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s upper body. Rollover capable roof-rail airbags are designed to help contain the head and chest of occupants in the outboard seating positions in the fir[...]

  • Страница 95

    { CAUTION: When an airbag inflates, there may be dust in the air. This dust could cause breathing problems for people with a history of asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in the vehicle should get out as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have breathing problems but cannot get out of the vehicle after an airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a window or a door. If you experience breathing problems following an airbag deployment, you should seek medical attention. The vehicle has a feature that may automatically unlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on, and turn the hazard warning flashers on when the airbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn the [...]

  • Страница 96

    Passenger Sensing System The vehicle has a passenger sensing system for the right front passenger position. The passenger airbag status indicator will be visible on the overhead console when the vehicle is started. The words ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, will be visible during the system check. If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check. When the system check is complete, either the word ON or OFF, or the symbol for on or off, will be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-38 . The passenger sensing system will turn off the right front passenger frontal airbag under certain conditions. The dr[...]

  • Страница 97

    { CAUTION: A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates. This is because the back of the rear-facing child restraint would be very close to the inflating airbag. A child in a forward-facing child restraint can be seriously injured or killed if the right front passenger airbag inflates and the passenger seat is in a forward position. Even if the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, no system is fail-safe. No one can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under some unusual circumstance, even though the airbag is turned off. Secure rear-facing child restraints in a rear[...]

  • Страница 98

    When the passenger sensing system has turned off the right front passenger frontal airbag, the off indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 3-38 . The passenger sensing system is designed to turn on (may inflate) the right front passenger frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the right front passenger seat. When the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is active. For some children, including children in child restraints, and for very small adults, the passenger sensi[...]

  • Страница 99

    If the On Indicator is Lit for a Child Restraint If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator is lit: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove the child restraint from the vehicle. 3. Remove any additional items from the seat such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 4. Reinstall the child restraint following the directions provided by the child restraint manufacturer and refer to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front Seat Position on page 1-77 . 5. If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, turn the vehicle off. Then slightly recline the vehicle seatback and adjust the seat cushion, [...]

  • Страница 100

    If the Of f Indicator is Lit for an Adult-Size Occupant If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front passenger seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be because that person is not sitting properly in the seat. If this happens, use the following steps to allow the system to detect that person and enable the right front passenger frontal airbag: 1. Turn the vehicle off. 2. Remove any additional material from the seat, such as blankets, cushions, seat covers, seat heaters, or seat massagers. 3. Place the seatback in the fully upright position. 4. Have the person sit upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with legs comfortably extended. 5. Restart the vehicle and hav[...]

  • Страница 101

    Additional Factors Af fecting System Operation Safety belts help keep the passenger in position on the seat during vehicle maneuvers and braking, which helps the passenger sensing system maintain the passenger airbag status. See “Safety Belts” and “Child Restraints” in the Index for additional information about the importance of proper restraint use. If the shoulder portion of the belt is pulled out all the way, the child restraint locking feature will be engaged. This may unintentionally cause the passenger sensing system to turn the airbag off for some adult size occupants. If this happens, let the belt go back all the way and start again. A thick layer of additional material, such[...]

  • Страница 102

    Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle Airbags affect how the vehicle should be serviced. There are parts of the airbag system in several places around the vehicle. Your dealer/retailer and the service manual have information about servicing the vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15 . { CAUTION: For up to 10 seconds after the ignition is turned off and the battery is disconnected, an airbag can still inflate during improper service. You can be injured if you are close to an airbag when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors. They are probably part of the airbag system. Be sure to follow proper service procedure[...]

  • Страница 103

    installed under or on top of the seat fabric, could also interfere with the operation of the passenger sensing system. This could either prevent proper deployment of the passenger airbag(s) or prevent the passenger sensing system from properly turning off the passenger airbag(s). See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 . If you have any questions about this, you should contact Customer Assistance before you modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2 . If your vehicle has rollover roof-rail airbags, see Different Size Tires and Wheels on pa[...]

  • Страница 104

    Restraint System Check Checking the Restraint Systems Safety Belts Now and then, check that the safety belt reminder light, safety belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages are all working properly. Look for any other loose or damaged safety belt system parts that might keep a safety belt system from doing its job. See your dealer/retailer to have it repaired. Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces. If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away. Make sure the safety belt reminder light is working. See Safety Belt Reminders on page 3-36 for more information. Keep safety belts clean and dry. See Care of Safety B[...]

  • Страница 105

    Replacing Restraint System Parts After a Crash { CAUTION: A crash can damage the restraint systems in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system may not properly protect the person using it, resulting in serious injury or even death in a crash. To help make sure your restraint systems are working properly after a crash, have them inspected and any necessary replacements made as soon as possible. If the vehicle has been in a crash, do you need new safety belts or LATCH system (if equipped) parts? After a very minor crash, nothing may be necessary. But the safety belt assemblies that were used during any crash may have been stressed or damaged. See your dealer/retailer to have the safety belt as[...]

  • Страница 106

    ✍ NOTES 1-100[...]

  • Страница 107

    Keys .............................................................. .2-3 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............... .2-4 Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation .................................................. .2-5 Remote Vehicle Start ..................................... .2-8 Doors and Locks ........................................... .2-10 Door Locks ................................................. .2-10 Power Door Locks ....................................... .2-10 Delayed Locking .......................................... .2-11 Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. .2-11 Rear Door Security Locks ............................. .2-11 Lockout Protection .............[...]

  • Страница 108

    Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. .2-54 Park Tilt Mirrors ........................................... .2-55 Outside Convex Mirror .................................. .2-55 Outside Heated Mirrors ................................. .2-55 Object Detection Systems .............................. .2-56 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) ........... .2-56 Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ........................ .2-58 Rear Vision Camera (RVC) ........................... .2-62 OnStar ® System ............................................ .2-68 Universal Home Remote System ..................... .2-71 Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) .........................[...]

  • Страница 109

    Keys { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition key is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function with the keys in the ignition and children could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle with children. The key is used for the ignition and all door locks. The key has a bar-coded key tag that the dealer/retailer or qualified locksmith can use to make new keys. Store this information in a safe place, not in the vehicle. 2-3[...]

  • Страница 110

    See your dealer/retailer if a replacement key or additional key is needed. Notice: If you ever lock your keys in the vehicle, you may have to damage the vehicle to get in. Be sure you have spare keys. If you are locked out of the vehicle, call the Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference [...]

  • Страница 111

    Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation The Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter functions work up to 195 feet (60 m) away from the vehicle. There are other conditions which can affect the performance of the transmitter. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System on page 2-4 . The following functions may be available if your vehicle has the RKE system: / (Remote Vehicle Start): For vehicles with this feature, press to start the engine from outside the vehicle using the RKE transmitter. See Remote Vehicle Start on page 2-8 for additional information. Q (Lock): Press to lock all the doors. If enabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC), the turn signal lamps flash once to indicate lo[...]

  • Страница 112

    K (Unlock): Press once to unlock only the driver door. If K is pressed again within three seconds, all remaining doors unlock. The interior lamps may come on and stay on for 20 seconds or until the ignition is turned on. If enabled through the DIC, the turn signal lamps flash twice to indicate unlocking has occurred. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 . If enabled through the DIC, the exterior lights turn on briefly if it is dark enough outside. See “APPROACH LIGHTING” under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 . Pressing K on the RKE transmitter disarms the content theft-deterrent system. See Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-22 . m (Lif[...]

  • Страница 113

    Programming Transmitters to the Vehicle Only RKE transmitters programmed to this vehicle will work. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can be purchased and programmed through your dealer/retailer. When the replacement transmitter is programmed to this vehicle, all remaining transmitters must also be reprogrammed. Any lost or stolen transmitters will no longer work once the new transmitter is programmed. The vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters programmed to it. See “Relearn Remote Key” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) on page 3-58 for instructions on how to program RKE transmitt[...]

  • Страница 114

    Remote Vehicle Start Your vehicle may have a remote starting feature. This feature allows you to start the engine from outside of the vehicle. It may also start up the vehicle’s heating or air conditioning systems and rear window defogger. Normal operation of the system will return after the key is turned to the ON/RUN position. If your vehicle has an automatic climate control system, the climate control system will default to a heating or cooling mode depending on the outside temperatures. If your vehicle does not have an automatic climate control system, the system will turn on at the setting the vehicle was set to when the vehicle was last turned off. During a remote start, if your vehi[...]

  • Страница 115

    3. If it is the first remote start since the vehicle has been driven, repeat these steps, while the engine is still running, to extend the engine running time by 10 minutes. Remote start can be extended one time. After entering the vehicle during a remote start, insert and turn the key to RUN to drive the vehicle. To manually shut off a remote start, do any of the following: • Aim the RKE transmitter at the vehicle and press the remote start button until the parking lamps turn off. • Turn on the hazard warning flashers. • Turn the ignition switch on and then off. The vehicle can be remote started two separate times between driving sequences. The engine will run for 10 minutes after e[...]

  • Страница 116

    Doors and Locks Door Locks { CAUTION: Unlocked doors can be dangerous. • Passengers, especially children, can easily open the doors and fall out of a moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the handle will not open it. The chance of being thrown out of the vehicle in a crash is increased if the doors are not locked. So, all passengers should wear safety belts properly and the doors should be locked whenever the vehicle is driven. • Young children who get into unlocked vehicles may be unable to get out. A child can be overcome by extreme heat and can suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Always lock the vehicle whenever leaving it. • Outsiders can easily enter through[...]

  • Страница 117

    Delayed Locking When locking the doors with the power lock switch and a door or the liftgate is open, the doors will lock five seconds after the last door is closed. You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed locking feature is in use. Pressing the power lock switch twice or the lock button on the RKE transmitter twice will override the delayed locking feature and immediately lock all the doors. This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition. You can program this feature using the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DELAY DOOR LOCK under DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 . Programmable Automatic Door Locks Vehicles with an automatic lock/unlo[...]

  • Страница 118

    When you want to open a rear door when the security lock is on, do the following: 1. Unlock the door by lifting the rear door manual lock, using the power door lock switch, or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter, if the vehicle has one. 2. Open the door from the outside. To cancel the rear door security lock, do the following: 1. Unlock the door and open it from the outside. 2. Insert the key into the security lock slot and turn it so the slot is in the vertical position. Lockout Protection This feature protects you from locking the key in the vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a front door is open. If the driver’s side power door lock switch is pressed when the driver’s [...]

  • Страница 119

    Liftgate/Liftglass { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to drive with the liftglass or liftgate open because carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If you must drive with the liftglass or liftgate open, or if electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass through the seal between the body and the liftglass or liftgate: • Make sure all other windows are shut. • Turn the fan on your heating or cooling system to its highest speed with the recirculation mode off. That will force outside air into your vehicle. See Climate Control System on page 3-22 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-24 . [...]

  • Страница 120

    On vehicles with a liftglass, press the button on the underside of the license pocket applique (A) to open it. The liftglass can also be opened by pressing the liftglass release button on the RKE. To open the entire liftgate, press the touchpad on the underside of the liftgate handle (B). The vehicle must be in PARK (P) to open the liftgate. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup or pull strap as an aid. The liftgate or liftglass cannot be opened if the rear wipers are in motion. Attempting to open the liftgate or liftglass while the rear wipers are in motion will cause the release of the liftglass or liftgate to delay until the wipers are moved off the liftglass. Both the liftglass and lif[...]

  • Страница 121

    Power Liftgate Power Liftgate Operation { CAUTION: Exhaust gases can enter the vehicle if it is driven with the liftgate, trunk/hatch open, or with any objects that pass through the seal between the body and the trunk/hatch or liftgate. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle must be driven with the liftgate, or trunk/hatch open: • Close all of the windows. • Fully open the air outlets on or under the instrument panel. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Adjust the Climate Control system to a setting that brings in only outside air and set the fan speed to the highest setting. See [...]

  • Страница 122

    The taillamps will flash and a chime will sound when the power liftgate is moving. { CAUTION: You or others could be injured if caught in the path of the power liftgate. Make sure there is no one in the way of the liftgate as it is opening and closing. Notice: If you open the liftgate without checking for overhead obstructions such as a garage door, you could damage the liftgate or the liftgate glass. Always check to make sure the area above and behind the liftgate is clear before opening it. The power liftgate can be power opened and closed in the following ways: • Press and hold the power liftgate button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter until the liftgate starts moving. Rem[...]

  • Страница 123

    The power liftgate may be temporarily disabled under extreme temperatures, or under low battery conditions. If this occurs, the liftgate can still be operated manually. If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) while the power function is in progress, the liftgate power function will continue to completion. If you shift the transmission out of PARK (P) and accelerate before the power liftgate latches closed, the liftgate may reverse to the open position. Cargo could fall out of the vehicle. Always make sure the power liftgate is closed and latched before you drive away. If you power open the liftgate and the liftgate support struts have lost pressure, the lights will flash and a chime w[...]

  • Страница 124

    Manual Operation of Power Liftgate To change the liftgate to manual operation, press the switch on the overhead console to the OFF position. With the power liftgate disabled and all of the doors unlocked, the liftgate can be manually opened and closed. To open the liftgate, press the touchpad on the handle on the outside of the liftgate, and lift the gate open. To close the liftgate, use the pull cup to lower the liftgate and close. The liftgate latch will power close. Always close the liftgate before driving. If the RKE button or the power close button on the liftgate is pressed while power operation is disabled, the lights will flash three times, but the liftgate will not move. It is not [...]

  • Страница 125

    Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous. They can be overcome by the extreme heat and suffer permanent injuries or even death from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle, especially with the windows closed in warm or hot weather. 2-19[...]

  • Страница 126

    Power Windows { CAUTION: Leaving children in a vehicle with the keys is dangerous for many reasons, children or others could be badly injured or even killed. They could operate the power windows or other controls or even make the vehicle move. The windows will function and they could be seriously injured or killed if caught in the path of a closing window. Do not leave keys in a vehicle with children. When there are children in the rear seat use the window lockout button to prevent unintentional operation of the windows. The power window controls are located on each of the side doors. The driver’s door also has switches that control the passenger and rear windows. The power windows work wh[...]

  • Страница 127

    Express-Down Windows Windows with an express-down feature allow the windows to be lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully on the window switch, then release, to activate the express-down mode. The express-down mode can be canceled at any time by pulling up on the front edge of the switch. Window Lockout o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch is located with the power window switches on the driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents the rear passenger windows from operating, except from the driver’s position. Press the switch to turn the lockout feature on or off. An indicator light will come on to show the lockout feature is on. Sun Visors Pull the sun visor down to[...]

  • Страница 128

    Theft-Deterrent Systems Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities. This vehicle has theft-deterrent features, however, they do not make it impossible to steal. Content Theft-Deterrent Your vehicle may have a content theft-deterrent alarm system. This is the security light. To arm the theft-deterrent system: 1. Open the door. 2. Lock the door with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter or the power door lock switch. The security light will come on to inform the driver the system is arming. If a door is open when the doors are locked, the security light will flash. If the delayed locking feature is turned on, the theft-deterrent system will not start the arming process unti[...]

  • Страница 129

    The theft-deterrent system will not activate if the doors are locked with the vehicle’s key or the manual door lock. It activates only if you use the power door lock switch with the door open or the RKE transmitter. You should also remember that you can start your vehicle with the correct ignition key if the alarm has been set off. To avoid setting off the alarm by accident: • If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent system, the vehicle should be locked with the door key after the doors are closed. • Always unlock the doors with the RKE transmitter. Unlocking a door any other way will set off the alarm if it is armed. If you set off the alarm by accident, press unlock on the [...]

  • Страница 130

    PASS-Key ® III+ Electronic Immobilizer The PASS-Key III+ system operates on a radio frequency subject to Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause harmful interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1. This device may not cause interference. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired[...]

  • Страница 131

    If the engine does not start and the security light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when trying to start the vehicle, there may be a problem with your theft-deterrent system. Turn the ignition off and try again. If the engine still does not start, and the key appears to be undamaged, try another ignition key. At this time, you may also want to check the fuse, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-115 . If the engine still does not start with the other key, your vehicle needs service. If your vehicle does start, the first key may be faulty. See your dealer/retailer who can service the PASS-Key ® III+ to have a new key made. In an emergency, contact Roadside Assistance. It is pos[...]

  • Страница 132

    Starting and Operating Your Vehicle New Vehicle Break-In Notice: The vehicle does not need an elaborate break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if you follow these guidelines: • Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for the first 500 miles (805 km). • Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to brake or slow the vehicle. • Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles (322 km) or so. During this time the new brake linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new linings can mean premature wear and earlier replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline every time[...]

  • Страница 133

    A (LOCK/OFF): This position locks the ignition. It also locks the transmission on automatic transmission vehicles. The key can be removed in LOCK/OFF. On vehicles with an automatic transmission, the shift lever must be in P (Park) to turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. The steering can bind with the wheels turned off center. If this happens, move the steering wheel from right to left while turning the key to ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesn’t work, then the vehicle needs service. Notice: Using a tool to force the key to turn in the ignition could cause damage to the switch or break the key. Use the correct key, make sure it is all the way in, and turn it only with your hand. If the key canno[...]

  • Страница 134

    Retained Accessory Power (RAP) The following vehicle accessories can be used for up to 10 minutes after the engine is turned off: • Audio System • Power Windows • OnStar ® System (if equipped) • Sunroof (if equipped) These features work when the key is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. Once the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF, the windows and sunroof continue to work up to 10 minutes until any door is opened. The radio continues to work for up to 10 minutes or until the driver door is opened. Starting the Engine If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). The engine will not start in any o[...]

  • Страница 135

    Starting Procedure 1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the ignition key to START. When the engine starts, let go of the key. The idle speed will go down as the engine gets warm. Do not race the engine immediately after starting it. Operate the engine and transmission gently to allow the oil to warm up and lubricate all moving parts. The vehicle has a Computer-Controlled Cranking System. This feature assists in starting the engine and protects components. If the ignition key is turned to the START position, and then released when the engine begins cranking, the engine will continue cranking for a few seconds or until the vehicle starts. If the engine does not start and the key i[...]

  • Страница 136

    Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal On vehicles with this feature, you can change the position of the throttle and brake pedals. No adjustment to the pedals can be made when the vehicle is in R (Reverse) or while using the cruise control. The switch used to adjust the pedals is located on the instrument panel below the climate control system. Press the arrow at the bottom of the switch to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the arrow at the top of the switch to move the pedals away from your body. Before you start driving, fully press the brake pedal to confirm the adjustment is right for you. While driving, make only small adjustments. The vehicle may have a memory function which le[...]

  • Страница 137

    { CAUTION: Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet could cause an electrical shock. Also, the wrong kind of extension cord could overheat and cause a fire. You could be seriously injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong extension cord rated for at least 15 amps. 4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and store the cord as it was before to keep it away from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could be damaged. The length of time the heater should remain plugged in depends on several factors. Ask a dealer/retailer in the area where you will be parking the vehicle for the best advic[...]

  • Страница 138

    Automatic Transmission Operation If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If the vehicle is has an automatic transmission, it has an electronic shift position indicator within the instrument panel cluster. This display comes on when the ignition key is turned to the ON/RUN position. There are several different positions for the shift lever. See “Range Selection Mode” later in this section. P (Park): This position locks the rear wheels. It is the best position to use when starting the engine because the vehicle cannot move easily. When parked on a hill, especially when the vehicle has a heavy load, you might notice an increase in the effort[...]

  • Страница 139

    { CAUTION: It is dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. Do not leave the vehicle when the engine is running unless you have to. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, always set the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park). See Shifting Into Park on page 2-47 . If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . { CAUTION: If you have Four-Wheel Drive, the vehicle will be free to roll — even if the shift lever is in P (Park) — i[...]

  • Страница 140

    N (Neutral): In this position, the engine does not connect with the wheels. To restart the engine when the vehicle is already moving, use N (Neutral) only. Also, use N (Neutral) when the vehicle is being towed. { CAUTION: Shifting into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed is dangerous. Unless your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could move very rapidly. You could lose control and hit people or objects. Do not shift into a drive gear while the engine is running at high speed. Notice: Shifting out of P (Park) or N (Neutral) with the engine running at high speed may damage the transmission. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Be sure the e[...]

  • Страница 141

    The vehicle has a shift stabilization feature that adjusts the transmission shifting to the current driving conditions in order to reduce rapid upshifts and downshifts. This shift stabilization feature is designed to determine, before making an upshift, if the engine is able to maintain vehicle speed by analyzing things such as vehicle speed, throttle position, and vehicle load. If the shift stabilization feature determines that a current vehicle speed cannot be maintained, the transmission does not upshift and instead holds the current gear. In some cases, this could appear to be a delayed shift, however the transmission is operating normally. The vehicle’s transmission uses adaptive shif[...]

  • Страница 142

    1 (First): For the Hydra-Matic ® 4-Speed transmission this position reduces vehicle speed even more than 2 (Second) without using the brakes. You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put in 1 (First) while the vehicle is moving forward, the transmission does not shift into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough. For a Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed transmission, this position reduces vehicle speed without using the brakes. You can use it for major/severe downgrades and off-road driving where the vehicle would otherwise accelerate due to steepness of grade. When you shift to 1 (First) it provides the lowest gear appropriate to the vehicle’s cu[...]

  • Страница 143

    To use this feature, do the following: 1. Move the shift lever to M (Manual Mode). 2. Press the plus/minus buttons, located on the steering column shift lever, to select the desired range of gears for the current driving conditions. When M (Manual Mode) is selected a number displays next to the M, indicating the current gear. This number is the highest gear that can be used. However, the vehicle can automatically shift to lower gears as it adjusts to driving conditions. This means that all gears below that number are available. When 5 (Fifth) is selected, 1 (First) through 5 (Fifth) gears are automatically shifted by the vehicle, but 6 (Sixth) cannot be used until the plus/minus button locat[...]

  • Страница 144

    Tow/Haul Mode The vehicle has a Tow/Haul mode. The selector button is located on the end of the column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist when towing or hauling a heavy load or if there is a need to charge a battery installed in a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. When Tow/Haul mode is selected the Tow/Haul indicator light will come on. The Tow/Haul mode works with the Autoride ® feature, if the vehicle has this, to enhance the ride when trailering or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride ® on page 4-50 . 2-38[...]

  • Страница 145

    Grade Braking (Hydra-Matic ® 6-Speed Automatic Transmission) The Grade Braking shift modes can be activated by pressing the button on the end of the shift control lever. While in Range Selection Mode, Grade Braking is deactivated allowing the driver to select a desired range of gears. Grade Braking is only active while the Tow/Haul Mode is selected and you are not in the Range Selection Mode. See “Tow/Haul Mode listed previously and Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-32 for more information on the Range Selection Mode. Grade Braking assists in maintaining desired vehicle speeds when driving on downhill grades by automatically implementing a shift schedule that utilizes the engine [...]

  • Страница 146

    Four-Wheel Drive If the vehicle has four-wheel drive, you can send the engine’s driving power to all four wheels for extra traction. Read the following before using four-wheel drive. Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for an extended period of time may cause premature wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time. While driving on clean dry pavement and during tight turns, you may experience a vibration in the steering system. The vehicle has StabiliTrak ® . Shifting into Four-Wheel-Drive Low will turn Traction Control and StabiliTra[...]

  • Страница 147

    2 m (Two-Wheel Drive High): This setting is used for driving in most street and highway situations. The front axle is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also provides the best fuel economy. AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This setting is ideal for use when road surface traction conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in AUTO, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is primarily sent to the rear wheels. When the vehicle’s software determines a need for more traction, the system will transfer more power to the front wheels. Driving in this mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than Two-Wheel Drive High. 4 m (Four-Wheel Drive High): Use the four-whee[...]

  • Страница 148

    Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive High or AUTO (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive) Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel High or AUTO position. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. The indicator light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when the shift is completed. Shifting Into Two-Wheel Drive High Turn the knob to the Two-Wheel High position. This can be done at any speed, except when shifting from Four-Wheel Drive Low. See shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low later in this section for more information. Shifting Into Four-Wheel Drive Low When Four-Wheel Low is engaged, vehicle speed should be kept below 45 mph (72 km/h). Extended high-speed operation in [...]

  • Страница 149

    Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Drive Low To shift from Four-Wheel Drive Low to Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High, the vehicle must be stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the transmission in N (Neutral) and the ignition in ON/RUN. The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel Drive Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Turn the knob to the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High position. You must wait for the Four-Wheel Drive High, AUTO, or Two-Wheel Drive High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on before shifting the transmission into gear. Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before the Four-Wheel Dri[...]

  • Страница 150

    7. If the engine is running, verify that the transfer case is in N (Neutral) by shifting the transmission to R (Reverse) for one second, then shift the transmission to D (Drive) for one second. 8. Turn the ignition to ACC/ACCESSORY, which will turn the engine off. 9. Place the transmission shift lever in P (Park). 10. Release the parking brake prior to moving the vehicle. 11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Shifting Out of Neutral To shift out of N Neutral do the following: 1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular brake pedal. 2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN with the engine off, and shift the transmission to N (Neutral). 3. Turn the transfer case dial to the desired transfer case shift p[...]

  • Страница 151

    Parking Brake For vehicles with a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40 . A chime sounds and the warning light flashes when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle is moving at least 5 mph (8 km/h). To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down. Then pull the bottom edge of the lever with the parking brake symbol, located above the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released, the brake system warning light goes off. Notice: Driving with the p[...]

  • Страница 152

    For vehicles without a release handle, set the parking brake by holding the regular brake pedal down, then pushing down the parking brake pedal. If the ignition is on, the brake system warning light will come on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40 . Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can overheat the brake system and cause premature wear or damage to brake system parts. Make sure that the parking brake is fully released and the brake warning light is off before driving. To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal down, then push down momentarily on the parking brake pedal until you feel the pedal release. Slowly pull your foot up off the park brake pedal. If th[...]

  • Страница 153

    Shifting Into Park { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. The vehicle can roll. If you have left the engine running, the vehicle can move suddenly. You or others could be injured. To be sure the vehicle will not move, even when you are on fairly level ground, use the steps that follow. With four-wheel drive, if the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . 1. Hold the brake pedal down, then set [...]

  • Страница 154

    Leaving the Vehicle With the Engine Running { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to leave the vehicle with the engine running. The vehicle could move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. If you have four-wheel drive and the transfer case is in N (Neutral), the vehicle will be free to roll, even if the shift lever is in P (Park). So be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not in N (Neutral). And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine running, it could overheat and even catch fire. You or others could be injured. Do not leave the vehicle with the engine running unless you have to. If you have to leave the vehicle with the engine runnin[...]

  • Страница 155

    Shifting Out of Park This vehicle is equipped with an electronic shift lock release system. The shift lock release is designed to: • Prevent ignition key removal unless the shift lever is in P (Park) with the shift lever button fully released, and • Prevent movement of the shift lever out of P (Park), unless the ignition is in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY and the regular brake pedal is applied. The shift lock release is always functional except in the case of an uncharged or low voltage (less than 9 volt) battery. If the vehicle has an uncharged battery or a battery with low voltage, try charging or jump starting the battery. See Jump Starting on page 5-44 for more information. To shift out o[...]

  • Страница 156

    Engine Exhaust { CAUTION: Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. Exposure to CO can cause unconsciousness and even death. Exhaust may enter the vehicle if: • The vehicle idles in areas with poor ventilation (parking garages, tunnels, deep snow that may block underbody airflow or tail pipes). • The exhaust smells or sounds strange or different. • The exhaust system leaks due to corrosion or damage. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • The vehicle’s exhaust system has been modified, damaged or improperly repaired. • There are holes or openings in the vehicle body from damage or after-market modifications that are not completely seale[...]

  • Страница 157

    Running the Vehicle While Parked It is better not to park with the engine running. But if you ever have to, here are some things to know. { CAUTION: Idling a vehicle in an enclosed area with poor ventilation is dangerous. Engine exhaust may enter the vehicle. Engine exhaust contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. Never run the engine in an enclosed area that has no fresh air ventilation. For more information, see Engine Exhaust on page 2-50 . { CAUTION: It can be dangerous to get out of the vehicle if the automatic transmission shift lever is not fully in P (Park) with the parking brake firmly set. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUT[...]

  • Страница 158

    Mirrors Manual Rearview Mirror Hold the inside rearview mirror in the center to move it for a clearer view behind your vehicle. Adjust the mirror to avoid glare from the headlamps behind you. Push the tab forward for daytime use and pull it for nighttime use. Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror The vehicle may have an automatic dimming inside rearview mirror. Vehicles with OnStar ® have three additional control buttons for the OnStar ® system. See your dealer/retailer for more information about OnStar ® and how to subscribe to it. See OnStar ® System on page 2-68 for more information about the services OnStar ® provides. O (On/Off): Press to turn the dimming feature on or off. The vehicle[...]

  • Страница 159

    Outside Towing Mirrors If the vehicle has towing mirrors, they can be adjusted for a clearer view of the objects behind you. Manually pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when towing a trailer. Manually fold the mirrors forward or rearward. The lower portion of the mirror is convex. A convex mirror’s surface is curved to see more from the driver seat. The convex mirror can be adjusted manually to the driver preferred position for better vision. The mirror may have a turn signal arrow that flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Outside Power Mirrors Vehicles with outside power mirrors have the controls on the driver door armrest. To adjust each mirror: [...]

  • Страница 160

    Manually fold the mirrors inward to prevent damage when going through an automatic car wash. To fold, push the mirror toward the vehicle. Push the mirror outward, to return to its original position. Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors Vehicles with outside power foldaway mirrors have the controls located on the driver door armrest. Mirror Adjustment 1. Press (C) to fold the mirrors out to the driving position. 2. Press (D) to fold the mirrors in to the folded position. Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors Reset the power foldaway mirrors if: • The mirrors are accidentally obstructed while folding. • They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded. • The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded [...]

  • Страница 161

    Park Tilt Mirrors Vehicles with the memory package have a passenger and/or driver mirror that tilts to a preselected position when the vehicle is in R (Reverse). This feature lets the driver view the curb when parallel parking. The mirror(s) return to the original position when the vehicle is shifted out of R (Reverse), or the ignition is turned off. Turn this feature on or off through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information. Outside Convex Mirror { CAUTION: A convex mirror can make things, like other vehicles, look farther away than they really are. If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you could hit a veh[...]

  • Страница 162

    Object Detection Systems Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) For vehicles with the Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system, it operates at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h), and assists the driver with parking and avoiding objects while in R (Reverse). The sensors on the rear bumper are used to detect the distance to an object up to 8 feet (2.5 m) behind the vehicle, and at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground. { CAUTION: The Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) system does not replace driver vision. It cannot detect: • objects that are below the bumper, underneath the vehicle, or if they are too close or far from the vehicle • children, pedestrians, bicyclists, or pets. CAUTIO[...]

  • Страница 163

    How the System Works URPA comes on automatically when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). The rear display briefly illuminates to indicate the system is working. URPA operates only at speeds less than 5 mph (8 km/h). If the vehicle is above this speed, the red light on the rear display will flash. To be detected, objects must be at least 10 inches (25.4 cm) off the ground and below liftgate level. Objects must also be within 8 feet (2.5 m) from the rear bumper. This distance may be less during warmer or humid weather. A single beep will sound the first time an object is detected between 40 inches (1 m) and 8 feet (2.5 m) away. Beeping will occur continuously when the vehicle is at [...]

  • Страница 164

    When the System Does Not Seem to Work Properly If the URPA system will not activate due to a temporary condition, the message PARK ASSIST OFF will be displayed on the DIC and a red light will be shown on the rear URPA display when the shift lever is moved into R (Reverse). This occurs under the following conditions: • The driver disables the system. • The ultrasonic sensors are not clean. Keep the vehicle’s rear bumper free of mud, dirt, snow, ice and slush. For cleaning instructions, see Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-110 . • A trailer was attached to the vehicle, or a bicycle or an object was hanging out of the liftgate during the last drive cycle, the red light may illuminate in t[...]

  • Страница 165

    The manufacturer is not responsible for any radio or TV interference caused by unauthorized modifications to this equipment. Such modifications could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. { CAUTION: SBZA is only a lane changing aid and does not replace driver vision. SBZA does not detect: • Vehicles outside the side blind zones which may be rapidly approaching. • Pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. Failure to use proper care when changing lanes may result in damage to the vehicle, injury, or death. Always check the outside and rearview mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use the turn signal before changing lanes. When the system detects a vehicle in the side blind [...]

  • Страница 166

    SBZA Detection Zones The SBZA sensor covers a zone of approximately one lane over from both sides of the vehicle, 11 ft. or 3.5 m. This zone starts at each side mirror and goes back approximately 16 ft. (5.0 m). The height of the zone is approximately between 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) and 6 ft. (2.0 m) off the ground. Use caution while changing lanes when towing a trailer, as the SBZA detection zones do not change when a trailer is towed. How the System Works When the vehicle is started, both outside mirror displays will briefly come on to indicate that the system is operating. When the vehicle is moving forward, the left or right side mirror SBZA display will light up if a vehicle is detected in tha[...]

  • Страница 167

    SBZA can be disabled through the Driver Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51 for more information. If the SBZA is disabled by the driver, the SBZA mirror displays will not light up during normal driving. When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly Occasional missed alerts can occur under normal circumstances and will increase in wet conditions. The system does not need to be serviced due to an occasional missed alert. The number of missed alerts will increase with increased rainfall or road spray. If the SBZA displays do not light up when the system is on and vehicles are in the blind zone, the system may need service. Take the vehicle to your dealer/[...]

  • Страница 168

    SBZA Error Messages The following messages may appear in the DIC: SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF: This message indicates that the driver has turned the system off. SIDE BLIND ZONE SYS. UNAVAILABLE: This message indicates that the SBZA system is disabled either because the sensor is blocked and cannot detect vehicles in your blind zone, or the vehicle is passing through an open field of view area, such as the desert, where there is insuff icient data for operation. The sensor may be blocked by mud, dirt, snow, ice, slush, or even heavy rainstorms. This message may also activate during heavy rain or due to road spray. The vehicle does not need service. For cleaning, see Washing Your Vehicle[...]

  • Страница 169

    Vehicles Without Navigation System The rear vision camera system is designed to help the driver when backing up by displaying a view of the area behind the vehicle. When the key is in the ON/RUN position and the driver shifts the vehicle into R (Reverse), the video image automatically appears on the inside rear view mirror. Once the driver shifts out of R (Reverse), the video image automatically disappears from the inside rear view mirror. Turning the Rear Vision Camera System O f fo rO n To turn off the rear vision camera system, press and hold z , located on the inside rearview mirror, until the left indicator light turns off. The rear camera vision display is now disabled. To turn the rea[...]

  • Страница 170

    4. Select the Video screen button. When the Video screen button is highlighted the RVC system is on. The delay that is received after shifting out of R (Reverse) is approximately 10 seconds. The delay can be cancelled by performing one of the following: • Pressing a hard key on the navigation system. • Shifting in to P (Park). • Reach a vehicle speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). There is a message on the rear vision camera screen that states “Check Surroundings for Safety”. Adjusting the Brightness and Contrast of the Screen To adjust the brightness and contrast of the screen, press the MENU button while the rear vision camera image is on the display. Any adjustments made will only affect th[...]

  • Страница 171

    Symbols The navigation system may have a feature that lets the driver view symbols on the navigation screen while using the rear vision camera. The Ultrasonic Rear Park Assist (URPA) system must not be disabled to use the caution symbols. If URPA has been disabled and the symbols have been turned on, the Rear Parking Assist Symbols Unavailable error message may display. See Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist (URPA) on page 2-56 . The symbols appear when an object has been detected by the URPA system. The symbol may cover the object when viewing the navigation screen. To turn the symbols on or off: 1. Make sure that URPA has not been disabled. 2. Shift into P (Park). 3. Press the MENU hard key to[...]

  • Страница 172

    Rear Vision Camera Location The image is provided by the camera located above the license plate. The camera uses a special lens. The distance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. The area displayed by the camera is limited. The camera does not display objects which are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper. The area displayed on the screen can vary according to vehicle orientation or road conditions. The following illustration shows the field of view that the camera provides. 2-66[...]

  • Страница 173

    When the System Does Not Seem To Work Properly The rear vision camera system might not work properly or display a clear image if: • The RVC is turned off. See “Turning the Rear Camera System On or Off” earlier in this section. • It is dark. • The sun or the beam of headlights is shining directly into the camera lens. • Ice, snow, mud, or anything else builds up on the camera lens. Clean the lens, rinse it with water, and wipe it with a soft cloth. • The back of the vehicle is in an accident, the position and mounting angle of the camera can change or the camera can be affected. Be sure to have the camera and its position and mounting angle checked at your dealer/retailer. • T[...]

  • Страница 174

    OnStar ® System OnStar uses several innovative technologies and live advisors to provide a wide range of safety, security, information, and convenience services. If the airbags deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call to OnStar Emergency advisors who can request emergency services be sent to your location. If the keys are locked in the vehicle, call OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR to have a signal sent to unlock the doors. OnStar Hands-Free Calling, including 30 trial minutes good for 60 days, is available on most vehicles. OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation service, with one trial route, is available on most vehicles. Press the OnStar button to have an OnStar advisor contact Roadside [...]

  • Страница 175

    OnStar Services Available with the Safe & Sound Plan • Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment • Advanced Automatic Crash Notification (AACN) (If equipped) • Link to Emergency Services • Roadside Assistance • Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance • Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert • OnStar Vehicle Diagnostic Email • GM Goodwrench On Demand Diagnostics • OnStar Hands-Free Calling with 30 trial minutes • OnStar Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only) OnStar Services Included with Directions & Connections Plan • All Safe and Sound Plan Services • OnStar Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped) or Driving Directions - Advisor delivered • RideAssist • Information and Conve[...]

  • Страница 176

    OnStar Virtual Advisor OnStar Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar Hands-Free Calling that uses minutes to access location-based weather, local traff ic reports, and stock quotes. Press the phone button and give a few simple voice commands to browse through the various topics. See the OnStar Owner’s Guide for more information. This feature is only available in the continental U.S. OnStar Steering Wheel Controls This vehicle may have a Talk/Mute button that can be used to interact with OnStar Hands-Free Calling. See Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-138 for more information. On some vehicles, the mute button can be used to dial numbers into voice mail systems, or to dial phone exten[...]

  • Страница 177

    The vehicle must have a working electrical system, including adequate battery power, for the OnStar equipment to operate. There are other problems OnStar cannot control that may prevent OnStar from providing OnStar service at any particular time or place. Some examples are damage to important parts of the vehicle in a crash, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weather or wireless phone network congestion. Your Responsibility Increase the volume of the radio if the OnStar advisor cannot be heard. If the light next to the OnStar buttons is red, the system may not be functioning properly. Press the OnStar button and request a vehicle diagnostic. If the light appears clear (no light is appearing), y[...]

  • Страница 178

    Universal Home Remote System Operation (With Three Round LED) This vehicle may have the Universal Home Remote System. If there are three round Light Emitting Diode (LED) indicator lights above the Universal Home Remote buttons, follow the instructions below. This system provides a way to replace up to three remote control transmitters used to activate devices such as garage door openers, security systems, and home automation devices. Do not use this system with any garage door opener that does not have the stop and reverse feature. This includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982. Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the transmitter. Becau[...]

  • Страница 179

    Programming Universal Home Remote — Rolling Code For questions or help programming the Universal Home Remote System, call 1-866-572-2728 or go to learcar2u.com. Most garage door openers sold after 1996 are Rolling Code units. Programming a garage door opener involves time-sensitive actions, so read the entire procedure before starting. Otherwise, the device will time out and the procedure will have to be repeated. To program up to three devices: 1. From inside the vehicle, press the two outside buttons at the same time for one to two seconds, and immediately release them. 2. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn” or “Smart” butto[...]

  • Страница 180

    4. Immediately, within one second, release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 5. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Rolling Code device such as an additional garage door opener, a security device, or home automation device, repeat Steps 1 through 5, choosing a different function button in Step 3 than what was used for the garage door opener. If these instructions do not work, the garage door opener is probably a Fixed Code unit. Follow the Programming instructions that follow for a Fixed Code garage door opene[...]

  • Страница 181

    The garage door opener receiver (motor head unit) could also have a row of dip switches that can be used when programming the Universal Home Remote. If the total number of switches on the motor head and hand held transmitter are different, or if the dip switch settings are different, use the dip switch settings on the motor head unit to program the Universal Home Remote. The motor head dip switch settings can also be used when the original hand held transmitter is not available. The panel of switches might not appear exactly as they do in the examples above, but they should be similar. The switch positions on the hand-held transmitter could be labeled, as follows: • A switch in the up posi[...]

  • Страница 182

    2. Write down the eight to 12 switch settings from left to right as follows: • When a switch is in the up position, write “Left.” • When a switch is in the down position, write “Right.” • If a switch is set between the up and down position, write “Middle.” The switch settings written down in Step 2 now become the button strokes to be entered into the Universal Home Remote in Step 4. Be sure to enter the switch settings written down in Step 2, in order from left to right, into the Universal Home Remote, when completing Step 4. 3. From inside your vehicle, first firmly press all three buttons at the same time for about three seconds. Release the buttons to put the Universal[...]

  • Страница 183

    5. After entering all of the switch positions, again, firmly press and release all three buttons at the same time. The indicator lights will turn on. 6. Press and hold the button that will be used to control the garage door until the garage door moves. The indicator light above the selected button should slowly blink. This button may need to be held for up to 55 seconds. 7. Immediately release the button when the garage door moves. The indicator light will blink rapidly until programming is complete. 8. Press and release the same button again. The garage door should move, confirming that programming is successful and complete. To program another Fixed Code device such as an additional gara[...]

  • Страница 184

    Storage Areas Glove Box Lift up on the glove box lever to open it. Cupholders For vehicles with cupholders located in the front and rear of the floor console or in the fold down armrest, adjust the front cupholders by moving the insert forward or rearward. Pull downward on the lid to access the rear floor console cupholders. There could also be cupholders located in the second and third row seat armrest areas. 2-78[...]

  • Страница 185

    Center Console Storage For vehicles with a console compartment, it is located between the bucket seats. Press the button and lift the lid to access the console compartment. A cupholder located in the rear of the console, swings down for the rear seat passenger to use. Luggage Carrier Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over the rear or sides of the vehicle can damage the vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats as far forward as possible and against the side rails, making sure to fasten it securely. For vehicles with a luggage carrier, items can be loaded on top of the vehicle. The luggage carrier has siderails attached to the [...]

  • Страница 186

    Rear Storage Area For vehicles with a rear storage area, it is located in the rear cargo area of the vehicle on the driver’s side trim panel. Turn the knobs and swing the storage door to access the storage compartment. The door can be removed. Rear Seat Armrest For vehicle with a rear seat armrest, pull the loop at the top of the armrest down to access the cupholders. Cargo Cover { CAUTION: An improperly stored cargo cover could be thrown about the vehicle during a collision or sudden maneuver. Someone could be injured. If the cover is removed, always store it in the proper storage location. When it is replaced, always be sure that it is securely reattached. To use the cover, for vehicles [...]

  • Страница 187

    To put the cover in the vehicle: 1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces rearward with the round surface facing down. 2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the cover end cap into the slot in the passenger side trim panel. 3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold it next to the driver’s side trim panel slot. 4. Press the end caps in, to allow the cover to fit into the trim slot. 5. Pull lightly on the cover holder to make sure it is secure. On extended wheelbase models there are two cover positions. The slots furthest forward allow the cover to be used if the third seat is removed or folded down. The cover can be installed and removed from either side. Sunroof Yo[...]

  • Страница 188

    The sunroof has a comfort stop feature which stops the sunroof from opening to the full-open position. From the comfort stop position, press the rear of the driver’s side switch a second time to open the sunroof to the full-open position. When the sunroof is opened, an air deflector will automatically raise. The air deflector will retract when the sunroof is closed. Express-Open/Express-Close: To express-open the sunroof, fully press and release the rear of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof will open automatically. To stop the sunroof partway, press the switch a second time. To express-close the sunroof, fully press and release the front of the driver’s side switch. The sunroof w[...]

  • Страница 189

    Instrument Panel Overview .............................. .3-4 Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... .3-6 H o r n ............................................................ .3-6 Tilt Wheel .................................................... .3-6 Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................ .3-7 Turn and Lane-Change Signals ....................... .3-7 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ................. .3-8 Flash-to-Pass ................................................ .3-8 Windshield Wipers ......................................... .3-9 Rainsense™ II Wipers .................................... .3-9 Windshield Washer ...................................... .3-10[...]

  • Страница 190

    Oil Pressure Light ........................................ .3-48 Security Light .............................................. .3-48 Fog Lamp Light ........................................... .3-49 Cruise Control Light ..................................... .3-49 Highbeam On Light ...................................... .3-49 Tow/Haul Mode Light ................................... .3-49 Fuel Gage .................................................. .3-50 Low Fuel Warning Light ................................ .3-51 Driver Information Center (DIC) ...................... .3-51 DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) ................................... .3-52 DIC Operation and Displays (Witho[...]

  • Страница 191

    ✍ NOTES 3-3[...]

  • Страница 192

    Instrument Panel Overview United States version shown; Canada similar 3-4[...]

  • Страница 193

    The main components of the instrument panel are the following: A. Outlet Adjustment on page 3-30 . B. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7 . C. Instrument Panel Cluster on page 3-35 . D. Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6 . E. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-32 . F. Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38 (If Equipped). G. Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-51 . H. Audio System(s) on page 3-83 . I. Exterior Lamps on page 3-14 . J. Dome Lamp Override on page 3-19 . Instrument Panel Brightness on page 3-18 . Fog Lamps on page 3-17 (If Equipped). K. Hood Release on page 5-13 . L. Integrated Trailer Brake Controller (If Equipped). Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 . M. [...]

  • Страница 194

    Hazard Warning Flashers | (Hazard Warning Flasher): Press this button located on top of the steering column, to make the front and rear turn signal lamps flash on and off. This warns others that you are having trouble. Press again to turn the flashers off. When the hazard warning flashers are on, the vehicle’s turn signals will not work. Horn To sound the horn, press the center pad on the steering wheel. Tilt Wheel The vehicle has a tilt wheel that lets the steering wheel be adjusted. The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left side of the column. To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable position and rele[...]

  • Страница 195

    Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever The lever on the left side of the steering column includes the following: G : Turn and Lane Change Signals 53 : Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer N : Windshield Wipers L : Windshield Washer 5 : Rear Wiper Delay Z : Rear Wiper = : Rear Wiper Wash Flash-to-Pass. Information for these features is on the pages following. Turn and Lane-Change Signals An arrow on the instrument panel cluster flashes in the direction of the turn or lane change. Move the lever all the way up or down to signal a turn. Raise or lower the lever for less than one second until the arrow starts to flash to signal a lane change. This causes the turn signals to automatically flash three times[...]

  • Страница 196

    If after signaling a turn or a lane change the arrows flash rapidly or do not come on, a signal bulb could be burned out. Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulb is not burned out, check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-115 . Turn Signal On Chime If the turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will also appear in the Driver Information Control (DIC). To turn the chime and message off, move the turn signal lever to the off position. Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer 53 (Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer): To change the headlamps from low to high beam, push the lever toward the ins[...]

  • Страница 197

    Windshield Wipers Turn the band with the wiper symbol to control the windshield wipers. 8 (Mist): Turn to mist for a single wiping cycle. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go. The wipers stop after one wipe. Hold the band on mist longer, for more wipe cycles. 9 (Off): Turns the wipers of f. 6 (Delay): Turn the band to adjust the delay time. The delay between wiping cycles becomes shorter as the band is moved to the top of the lever. This can be very useful in light rain or snow. 6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed. ? (High Speed): For high-speed wiping. Clear ice and snow from the wiper blades before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield, gently loosen or th[...]

  • Страница 198

    When Rainsense is active, the headlamps will turn on automatically if the exterior lamp control is in the AUTO position and the wipers are active. Notice: Going through an automatic car wash with the wipers on can damage them. Turn the wipers off when going through an automatic car wash. Windshield Washer { CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. L (Washer Fluid): Push the paddle marked with the windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction lever, to spray washer fluid on the windshield. The wipers clear the window and then either stop or return to the pr[...]

  • Страница 199

    Rear Window Wiper/Washer { CAUTION: In freezing weather, do not use your washer until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the washer fluid can form ice on the windshield, blocking your vision. The rear wiper control is located on the turn signal/multifunction lever. To turn the rear wiper on, slide the lever to a wiper position. 9 (Off): Turns the wiper of f. 5 (Rear Wiper Delay): Turns on the rear wiper delay. Z (Rear Wiper): Turns on the rear wiper. = (Rear Wiper Wash): To turn on the rear wiper wash, push the button on the end of the turn signal/multifunction lever to spray washer fluid on the rear window. The wipers will clear the rear window and either stop or return to your preset sp[...]

  • Страница 200

    Cruise Control { CAUTION: Cruise control can be dangerous where you cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do not use the cruise control on winding roads or in heavy traff ic. Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire traction can cause excessive wheel slip, and you could lose control. Do not use cruise control on slippery roads. With cruise control, a speed of about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more can be maintained without keeping your foot on the accelerator. Cruise control does not work at speeds below about 25 mph (40 km/h). When the brakes are applied, cruise control is turned off. If the vehicle has StabiliTrak ® , and the system begins to lim[...]

  • Страница 201

    Setting Cruise Control Cruise control will not work if the parking brake is set, or if the master cylinder brake fluid level is low. The cruise control light on the instrument panel cluster comes on after the cruise control has been set to the desired speed. { CAUTION: If you leave your cruise control on when you are not using cruise, you might hit a button and go into cruise when you do not want to. You could be startled and even lose control. Keep the cruise control switch off until you want to use cruise control. 1. Press the I button. 2. Get up to the desired speed. 3. Press the SET − button located on the steering wheel and release it. 4. Take your foot off the accelerator. Resuming [...]

  • Страница 202

    Reducing Speed While Using Cruise Control To reduce the vehicle speed while using cruise control: • Press and hold the SET– button on the steering wheel until the desired lower speed is reached, then release it. • To slow down in very small amounts, press the SET– button on the steering wheel briefly. Each time this is done, the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower. Passing Another Vehicle While Using Cruise Control Use the accelerator pedal to increase the vehicle speed. When you take your foot off the pedal, the vehicle will slow down to the previous set cruise speed. Using Cruise Control on Hills How well the cruise control will work on hills depends upon the vehicle speed,[...]

  • Страница 203

    • License Plate Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights The exterior lamps control has four positions: O (Off): Turns of f the automatic headlamps and daytime running lamps (DRL). Turning the headlamp control to the off position again will turn the automatic headlamps or DRL back on. For vehicles first sold in Canada, the off position will only work for vehicles that are shifted into the P (Park) position. AUTO (Automatic): Automatically turns on the headlamps at normal brightness, together with the following: • Parking Lamps • Instrument Panel Lights • Taillamps • License Plate Lamps ; (Parking Lamps): Turns on the parking lamps together with the following: • Instrument Panel Lights [...]

  • Страница 204

    Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for others to see the front of your vehicle during the day. Fully functional daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles first sold in Canada. The DRL system will come on when the following conditions are met: • The ignition is on. • The exterior lamps control is in AUTO. • The transmission is not in P (Park). • The light sensor determines it is daytime. When the DRL are on, only the DRL lamps will be on. The taillamps, sidemarker, instrument panel lights, and other lamps will not be on. When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp system will switch from DRL to the headlamps. To turn off the DRL[...]

  • Страница 205

    There is a delay in the transition between the daytime and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so that driving under bridges or bright overhead street lights does not affect the system. The DRL and automatic headlamp system is only affected when the light sensor detects a change in lighting lasting longer than the delay. If the vehicle is started in a dark garage, the automatic headlamp system will come on immediately. Once the vehicle leaves the garage, it takes approximately one minute for the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is bright enough outside. During that delay, the instrument panel cluster may not be as bright a[...]

  • Страница 206

    Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp If the vehicle has this feature, this button includes wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service center to install an auxiliary roof lamp. This button is located on the overhead console. When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof mounted lamp, pressing the bottom of the button will activate the lamp and illuminate an indicator light at the bottom of this button. Pressing the top of the button will turn off the roof mounted lamp and indicator. The emergency roof lamp circuit is fused at 30 amps, so the total current draw of the attached lamps should be less than this value. The attachment points for the roof lamp circuits are two blunt cut wires [...]

  • Страница 207

    Dome Lamp Override The dome lamp override button is located next to the exterior lamps control. k (Dome Off): Press the button in and the dome lamps remain off when a door is opened. Press the button again to return it to the extended position so that the dome lamps come on when a door is opened. Entry Lighting The vehicle has an illuminated entry feature. When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come on if the dome override button is in the extended position. If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will not come on. Exit Lighting The interior lamps come on when the key is removed from the ignition. They turn off automatically in 20 seconds. The lights do not come on if th[...]

  • Страница 208

    The battery can be discharged at idle if the electrical loads are very high. This is true for all vehicles. This is because the generator (alternator) may not be spinning fast enough at idle to produce all the power that is needed for very high electrical loads. A high electrical load occurs when several of the following are on, such as: headlamps, high beams, fog lamps, rear window defogger, climate control fan at high speed, heated seats, engine cooling fans, trailer loads, and loads plugged into accessory power outlets. EPM works to prevent excessive discharge of the battery. It does this by balancing the generator’s output and the vehicle’s electrical needs. It can increase engine id[...]

  • Страница 209

    Certain accessory plugs may not be compatible to the accessory power outlet and could result in blown adapter or vehicle fuses. If you experience a problem, see your dealer/retailer for additional information on the accessory power plugs. Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to the vehicle can damage it or keep other components from working as they should. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not use equipment exceeding maximum amperage rating of 20 amperes. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding electrical equipment. When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow the proper installation instructions included with the equipment. Do not use equipment exc[...]

  • Страница 210

    Climate Controls Climate Control System The heating, cooling, and ventilation in the vehicle can be controlled with this system. A. Fan Control B. REAR C. Recirculation D. Air Delivery Mode Control E. Air Conditioning F. Driver and Passenger Temperature Controls G. Rear Window Defogger Temperature Control: Move the thumbwheels up or down to increase or decrease the temperature on the driver’s side or the passenger side of the vehicle for the dual zone system. 9 (Fan Control): Turn the left knob clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed. Turn the knob all the way counterclockwise to turn the front system off. Air Delivery Mode Control: Turn clockwise or countercloc[...]

  • Страница 211

    - (Defog): The defog mode is used to clear the windows of fog or moisture. Air is directed to the windshield, floor outlets, and side window vents. In this mode, the system turns off recirculation and runs the air conditioning compressor unless the outside temperature is close to freezing. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defog mode. 0 (Defrost): The defrost mode is used to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly. Air is directed to the windshield and side window vents, with some directed to the floor vents. In this mode, the system automatically forces outside air into the vehicle. The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the defrost mode. The [...]

  • Страница 212

    Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. < (Rear Window Defogger): Press this button to turn the rear window defogger on or off. The system automatically turns off several minutes after it has been activated. The defogger can also be turned off by turning off the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors will heat to help clear fog or frost from the surface of the mirror when the rear window defog button is pressed. Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of the rear window. If you do, you could cut or damage the warming grid, and the [...]

  • Страница 213

    A. Fan Control B. AUTO C. Defrost D. Recirculation E. REAR F. Air Delivery Mode Control G. Driver Temperature Control H. Display I. Power Button J. Rear Window Defogger K. Air Conditioning L. PASS M. Passenger Temperature Control O (On/Off): Press to turn the climate control system on or off. Outside air still enters the vehicle, and is directed to the floor. This direction can be changed by pressing the mode button. Recirculation can be selected once you have selected vent or bi-level mode. The temperature can also be adjusted using either temperature button. If the air delivery mode or temperature settings are adjusted with the system off, the display illuminates briefly to show the sett[...]

  • Страница 214

    The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing the PASS button and turning off the PASS indicator. When the passenger’s temperature setting is set different than the driver’s setting, the indicator on the PASS button illuminates and both the driver side and passenger side temperature displays are shown. Automatic Operation AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is active the system will control the inside temperature, the air delivery, and the fan speed. Use the steps below to place the entire system in automatic mode: 1. Press the AUTO button. When AUTO is selected, the display will change to show the current temperature(s) a[...]

  • Страница 215

    Manual Operation DC (Fan Control): Press these buttons to increase or decrease the fan speed. Pressing either fan button while in automatic control places the fan under manual control. The fan setting remains displayed and the AUTO light turns off. The air delivery mode remains under automatic control. HG (Air Delivery Mode Control): Press these buttons to change the direction of the airflow in the vehicle. Repeatedly press either button until the desired mode appears on the display. Pressing either mode button while the system is off changes the air delivery mode without turning the system on. Pressing either mode button while in automatic control places the mode under manual control. The [...]

  • Страница 216

    # (Air Conditioning): Press to turn the air conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. An indicator light comes on to show that the air conditioning is on. If this button is pressed when the air conditioning compressor is unavailable, the indicator flashes three times and then turns off. If the air conditioning is on and the outside temperature drops below a temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be effective, the air conditioning light turns off to show that the air conditioning mode has been canceled. On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot inside air escape. This helps to reduce the time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. It also helps the system to operate[...]

  • Страница 217

    Rear Window Defogger The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the rear window. < (Rear Window Defogger): Press to turn the rear window defogger on or off. It automatically turns of f several minutes after it has been activated. The defogger can also be turned off by turning of f the engine. Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear. Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass. These actions may damage the rear defogger. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Heated Mirrors: For vehicles with heated outside rearview mirrors, the mirrors hea[...]

  • Страница 218

    The interior temperature sensors located in the headliner above the driver side seat and if equipped, in the headliner above the second row seats measure the temperature of the air inside the vehicle. There is also an exterior temperature sensor located behind the front grille. This sensor reads the outside air temperature and helps maintain the temperature inside the vehicle. Any cover on the front of the vehicle could cause a false reading in the displayed temperature. The climate control system uses the information from these sensors to maintain your comfort setting by adjusting the outlet temperature, fan speed, and the air delivery mode. The system may also supply cooler air to the side[...]

  • Страница 219

    Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System For vehicles with this system, the rear controls are three knobs located in the headliner. The system can also be controlled with the front controls. A. Fan Control B. Temperature Control C. Air Delivery Mode Control REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is on. See Climate Control System on page 3-22 or Dual Automatic Climate Control System on page 3-24 . The rear system can also be turned off by turning the rear fan knob to the 9 position. Mimic Mode: This mode matches the rear climate control to the front climate control airflow s[...]

  • Страница 220

    Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System and Electronic Climate Controls For vehicles with the rear heat and air conditioning controls, they are integrated with the rear seat audio controls located in the center console. The system can be controlled from the front controls as well as the rear controls. A. Fan Control B. Air Delivery Mode Control C. Temperature Control REAR: Press the REAR button on the front climate control system to turn the rear climate control system on or off. An indicator comes on when the rear system is on. The rear climate control system can also be turned off by pressing and holding the C button. To turn the system on from the rear seats, press any rear climate contr[...]

  • Страница 221

    Automatic Operation, If Equipped. AUTO: Press the air delivery mode button until this setting is selected to control the inside temperature, air delivery, and fan speed. AUTO appears in the display when automatic operation is active. +/ − (Increase/Decrease Temperature): Press the +o r − buttons to increase or decrease the cabin temperature. The rear control temperature display will show the temperature setting increasing or decreasing. The display only indicates climate control functions when the system is in rear independent mode. Manual Operation DC (Fan Control): Press these buttons on the rear seat audio control panel to increase or decrease the airflow. Pressing the fan up button [...]

  • Страница 222

    Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators Warning lights and gages can signal that something is wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to the warning lights and gages could prevent injury. Warning lights come on when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Some warning lights come on briefly when the engine is started to indicate they are working. Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem with one of the vehicle’s functions. Often gages and warning lights work together to indicate a problem with the vehicle. When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on while driving, or when one of the[...]

  • Страница 223

    Instrument Panel Cluster The instrument cluster is designed to show how the vehicle is running. It shows how fast the vehicle is going, about how much fuel the vehicle has and many other things needed to drive safely and economically. For vehicles with a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. United States 4-Speed version shown. 6-Speed and Canada similar. 3-35[...]

  • Страница 224

    Speedometer and Odometer The speedometer shows the vehicle’s speed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h). The odometer shows how far the vehicle has been driven, in either miles (used in the United States) or kilometers (used in Canada). Trip Odometer The trip odometer can show how far the vehicle has been driven since the trip odometer was last set to zero. Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle between the trip odometer and the regular odometer. Holding the reset button for approximately one second while the trip odometer is displayed resets it. To display the odometer reading with the ignition of[...]

  • Страница 225

    This chime and light are repeated if the passenger remains unbuckled and the vehicle is in motion. If the passenger safety belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the light comes on. The front passenger safety belt warning light and chime may turn on if an object is put on the seat such as a briefcase, handbag, grocery bag, laptop or other electronic device. To turn off the warning light and or chime, remove the object from the seat or buckle the safety belt. Airbag Readiness Light The system checks the airbag’s electrical system for possible malfunctions. If the light stays on it indicates there is an electrical problem. The system check includes the airbag sensor, the pretensioners, the a[...]

  • Страница 226

    Passenger Airbag Status Indicator The vehicle has the passenger sensing system. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-90 for important safety information. The overhead console has a passenger airbag status indicator. When the vehicle is started, the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds as a system check. If you are using remote start to start the vehicle from a distance, if equipped, you may not see the system check. Then, after several more seconds, the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the right front passenger frontal airbag. If the word ON or the[...]

  • Страница 227

    Charging System Light This light comes on briefly when the ignition key is turned to START, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. The light should go out once the engine starts. If it stays on, or comes on while driving, there could be a problem with the charging system. A charging system message in the Driver Information Center (DIC) can also appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. This light could indicate that there are problems with a generator drive belt, or that there is an electrical problem. Have it checked right away. If the vehicle must be driven a short d[...]

  • Страница 228

    Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a large number of electrical accessories are operating in the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an extended period. This condition is normal since the charging system is not able to provide full power at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds allow the charging system to create full power. If there is a problem with the battery charging system, this light will come on or the SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM DIC message will display. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Charging System Light on page 3-39 for more information. Brake System Warning Light With t[...]

  • Страница 229

    { CAUTION: The brake system might not be working properly if the brake system warning light is on. Driving with the brake system warning light on can lead to a crash. If the light is still on after the vehicle has been pulled off the road and carefully stopped, have the vehicle towed for service. If the light comes on while driving, pull off the road and stop carefully. The pedal might be harder to push or might go closer to the floor. It can take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle on page 4-43 . Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light For vehicles with the Antilock Brake System (ABS), this light comes on briefly when the[...]

  • Страница 230

    StabiliTrak ® Indicator Light For vehicles with the StabiliTrak ® system, this light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the light comes on and stays on while driving, there could be a problem with the StabiliTrak ® system and the vehicle might need service. When this warning light is on, the StabiliTrak ® system is off and does not limit wheel spin. The light flashes if the system is active and is working to assist the driver with directional control of the vehicle in diff icult driving conditions. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 for [...]

  • Страница 231

    Tire Pressure Light For vehicles with a tire pressure monitoring system, this light comes on briefly when the engine is started. It provides information about tire pressures and the Tire Pressure Monitoring System. When the Light is On Steady This indicates that one or more of the tires is significantly underinflated. A tire pressure message in the Driver Information Center (DIC), can accompany the light. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. Stop and check the tires as soon as it is safe to do so. If a tire is underinflated, inflate to the proper pressure. See Tires on page 5-61 for more information. When the Light Flashes First and Then is On Steady This ind[...]

  • Страница 232

    This light should come on when the ignition is on, but the engine is not running, as a check to show it is working. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. If the check engine light comes on and stays on, while the engine is running, this indicates that there is an OBD II problem and service is required. Malfunctions often are indicated by the system before any problem is apparent. Being aware of the light can prevent more serious damage to the vehicle. This system assists the service technician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction. Notice: If the vehicle is continually driven with this light on, after a while, the emission controls might not work as well, the v[...]

  • Страница 233

    If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park the vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds, and restart the engine. If the light is still flashing, follow the previous steps and see your dealer/retailer for service as soon as possible. Light On Steady: An emission control system malfunction has been detected on the vehicle. Diagnosis and service might be required. An emission system malfunction might be corrected by doing the following: • Make sure the fuel cap is fully installed. See Filling the Tank on page 5-9 . The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed. A loose or m[...]

  • Страница 234

    Emissions Inspection and Maintenance Programs Some state/provincial and local governments have or might begin programs to inspect the emission control equipment on the vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection could prevent getting a vehicle registration. Here are some things to know to help the vehicle pass an inspection: • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check engine light is on with the engine running, or if the key is in ON/RUN and the light is not on. • The vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD II (on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical emission control systems have not been completely diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be considered [...]

  • Страница 235

    Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range. When the oil pressure reaches the low pressure zone, the OIL PRESSURE LOW STOP ENGINE message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information. A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a dangerously low oil level or some other problem causing low oil pressure. Check the oil as soon as possible. { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check th[...]

  • Страница 236

    Oil Pressure Light { CAUTION: Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low. The engine can become so hot that it catches fire. Someone could be burned. Check the oil as soon as possible and have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance can damage the engine. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always follow the maintenance schedule in this manual for changing engine oil. This light comes on briefly while starting the engine. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/ retailer. If the system is working normally the indicator light then goes off. If the light comes on and stays on, it means that oil is not flowing through the[...]

  • Страница 237

    Fog Lamp Light The fog lamp light comes on when the fog lamps are in use. The light goes out when the fog lamps are turned off. See Fog Lamps on page 3-17 for more information. Cruise Control Light The cruise control light comes on whenever the cruise control is set. The light goes out when the cruise control is turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-12 for more information. Highbeam On Light This light comes on when the high-beam headlamps are in use. See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8 for more information. Tow/Haul Mode Light This light comes on when the Tow/Haul mode has been activated. For more information, see Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38 . 3-49[...]

  • Страница 238

    Fuel Gage The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, shows how much fuel the vehicle has left in the tank. An arrow on the fuel gage indicates the side of the vehicle the fuel door is on. The gage first indicates empty before the vehicle is out of fuel, and the vehicle’s fuel tank should be filled soon. When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW message appears in the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. Here are some situations owners may experience with the fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the fuel gage. • At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before the gage reads full. • It takes a little more or l[...]

  • Страница 239

    Low Fuel Warning Light This light, under the fuel gage, comes on briefly while the engine is being started. This light and a chime comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel. The Driver Information Center also displays a “FUEL LEVEL LOW” message. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. When fuel is added this light and message should go off. If it does not, have the vehicle serviced by your dealer/retailer. Driver Information Center (DIC) Your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC). The DIC displays information about your vehicle. It also displays warning messages if a system problem is detected. All messages will appear in the DIC display located below t[...]

  • Страница 240

    DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) If your vehicle has DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the DIC buttons located on the instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The DIC displays trip, fuel, and vehicle system information, and warning messages if a system problem is detected. The DIC also allows some features to be customized. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information. If your vehicle has DIC buttons, you can also use the trip odometer reset stem to view some of the DIC displays. See “DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons[...]

  • Страница 241

    T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to display the oil life, units, side blind zone system on/off, tire pressure readings for vehicles with the Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS), trailer brake gain and output information for vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, engine hours, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter programming, compass zone setting, and compass recalibration. U (Customization): Press this button to customize the feature settings on your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-74 for more information. V (Set/Reset): Press this button to set or reset certain functions and to turn off or acknowledge messages on the[...]

  • Страница 242

    Once the vehicle begins moving, the trip odometer will accumulate mileage. For example, if the vehicle was driven 5 miles (8 km) before it is started again, and then the retro-active reset feature is activated, the display will show 5 miles (8 km). As the vehicle begins moving, the display will then increase to 5.1 miles (8.2 km), 5.2 miles (8.4 km), etc. Fuel Range Press the trip/fuel button until FUEL RANGE displays. This display shows the approximate number of remaining miles (mi) or kilometers (km) the vehicle can be driven without refueling. The display will show LOW if the fuel level is low. The fuel range estimate is based on an average of the vehicle’s fuel economy over recent driv[...]

  • Страница 243

    To stop the timer, press the set/reset button briefly while TIMER is displayed. To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the set/reset button while TIMER is displayed. Transmission Temperature Press the trip/fuel button until TRANS TEMP displays. This display shows the temperature of the automatic transmission fluid in either degrees Fahrenheit (°F) or degrees Celsius (°C). Blank Display This display shows no information. Vehicle Information Menu Items T (Vehicle Information): Press this button to scroll through the following menu items: Oil Life Press the vehicle information button until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. [...]

  • Страница 244

    Side Blind Zone Alert If your vehicle has the Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) system, this display allows the system to be turned on or off. Once in this display, press the set/reset button to select between ON or OFF. If you choose ON, the system will be turned on. If you choose OFF, the system will be turned off. When the SBZA system is turned off, the DIC will display the SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM OFF message as a reminder that the system has been turned off. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 and Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) on page 2-58 for more information. Units Press the vehicle information button until UNITS displays. This display allows you to select between English or Metr[...]

  • Страница 245

    Trailer Gain and Output On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, the trailer brake display appears in the DIC. Press the vehicle information button until TRAILER GAIN and OUTPUT display. TRAILER GAIN shows the trailer gain setting. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust this setting, see “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. OUTPUT shows the power output to the trailer anytime a trailer with electric brakes is connected. Output is displayed in 0 to 10 bars. Dashes may appear in the OUTPUT display. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Contr[...]

  • Страница 246

    Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone. See DIC Compass on page 3-61 Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC Compass on page 3-61 Blank Display This display shows no information. DIC Operation and Displays (Without DIC Buttons) If your vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the information below explains the operation of this system. The DIC has different displays which can be accessed by pressing the trip odometer reset stem located on the instrument panel cluster. Pressing the trip odometer reset stem will also turn off, or acknowledge, DIC messages. The DIC displays trip and vehicle system information, and warning messages [...]

  • Страница 247

    Trip Odometer Press the trip odometer reset stem until TRIP displays. This display shows the current distance traveled in either miles (mi) or kilometers (km) since the last reset for the trip odometer. The trip odometer can be reset to zero by pressing and holding the trip odometer reset stem while the trip odometer is displayed. The trip odometer has a feature called the retro-active reset. This can be used to set the trip odometer to the number of miles (kilometers) driven since the ignition was last turned on. This can be used if the trip odometer is not reset at the beginning of the trip. To use the retro-active reset feature, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for at least fou[...]

  • Страница 248

    Compass Zone Setting This display allows for setting the compass zone. See DIC Compass on page 3-61 for more information. Compass Recalibration This display allows for calibrating the compass. See DIC Compass on page 3-61 for more information. Oil Life To access this display, the vehicle must be in P (Park). Press the trip odometer reset stem until OIL LIFE REMAINING displays. This display shows an estimate of the oil’s remaining useful life. If you see 99% OIL LIFE REMAINING on the display, that means 99% of the current oil life remains. The engine oil life system will alert you to change the oil on a schedule consistent with your driving conditions. When the remaining oil life is low, th[...]

  • Страница 249

    4. To match additional transmitters at this time, repeat Step 3. Each vehicle can have a maximum of eight transmitters matched to it. 5. To exit the programming mode, you must cycle the key to LOCK/OFF. Language This display allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. To select a language: 1. Press the trip odometer reset stem until ODOMETER displays. 2. While in the ODOMETER display, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for three seconds until the currently set language displays. 3. Continue to press and hold the trip odometer reset stem to scroll through all of the available languages. The available languages are ENGLISH (default), FRANCAIS (French), ESP[...]

  • Страница 250

    To adjust for compass variance, use the following procedure: Compass Variance (Zone) Procedure 1. Do not set the compass zone when the vehicle is moving. Only set it when the vehicle is in P (Park). Press the vehicle information button until PRESS V TO CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press the trip odometer reset stem until CHANGE COMPASS ZONE displays. 2. Find the vehicle’s current location and variance zone number on the map. Zones 1 through 15 are available. 3. Press the set/reset button to scroll through and select the appropriate variance zone. 3-62[...]

  • Страница 251

    4. Press the trip/fuel button until the vehicle heading, for example, N for North, is displayed in the DIC. Or, if the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, press and hold the trip odometer reset stem for two seconds to select the next available variance zone. Repeat this step until the appropriate variance zone is displayed. 5. If calibration is necessary, calibrate the compass. See “Compass Calibration Procedure” following. Compass Calibration The compass can be manually calibrated. Only calibrate the compass in a magnetically clean and safe location, such as an open parking lot, where driving the vehicle in circles is not a danger. It is suggested to calibrate away from tall buildings, u[...]

  • Страница 252

    DIC Warnings and Messages Messages are displayed on the DIC to notify the driver that the status of the vehicle has changed and that some action may be needed by the driver to correct the condition. Multiple messages may appear one after another. Some messages may not require immediate action, but you can press any of the DIC buttons on the instrument panel or the trip odometer reset stem on the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge that you received the messages and to clear them from the display. Some messages cannot be cleared from the DIC display because they are more urgent. These messages require action before they can be cleared. You should take any messages that appear on the displ[...]

  • Страница 253

    CHECK TRAILER WIRING On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message may display and a chime may sound when one of the following conditions exists: • A trailer with electric brakes becomes disconnected from the vehicle. − If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is stopped, this message clears itself after a short time. − If the disconnect occurs while the vehicle is moving, this message stays on until the ignition is turned off. • There is a short in the wiring to the electric trailer brakes. When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side [...]

  • Страница 254

    ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, severe engine damage may occur. If an overheat warning appears on the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as possible. See Engine Overheating on page 5-35 for more information. This message displays when the engine coolant temperature is too hot. Stop and allow the vehicle to idle until it cools down. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-42 . See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine is overheating, sever[...]

  • Страница 255

    HEATING WASH FLUID WASH WIPES PENDING This message displays when the heated windshield washer system is heating the fluid. See Windshield Washer on page 3-10 for more information. HOOD OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the hood is not fully closed. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the hood for obstructions, and close the hood again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. ICE POSSIBLE DRIVE WITH CARE This message displays when ice conditions are possible. LEFT REAR DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the driver side rear door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for ob[...]

  • Страница 256

    PASSENGER DOOR OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the front passenger door is not fully closed and the vehicle is shifted out of P (Park). Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for obstructions, and close the door again. Check to see if the message still appears on the DIC. REAR ACCESS OPEN This message displays and a chime sounds if the liftgate or liftglass is open while the ignition is in ON/RUN. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate and liftglass. Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the DIC display. REMOTE KEY LEARNING ACTIVE This message displays while you are matching a Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter to your vehicle. See “Matching Tran[...]

  • Страница 257

    SERVICE AIR BAG This message displays if there is a problem with the airbag system. Have your dealer/retailer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-37 and Airbag System on page 1-81 for more information. SERVICE BATTERY CHARGING SYSTEM On some vehicles, this message displays if there is a problem with the battery charging system. Under certain conditions, the charging system light may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster. See Charging System Light on page 3-39 . Driving with this problem could drain the battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Have the electrical system checked as soon as possible. See your dealer/retailer. SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM T[...]

  • Страница 258

    SERVICE STABILITRAK If your vehicle has StabiliTrak ® and this message displays, it means there may be a problem with the StabiliTrak system. If you see this message, try to reset the system. Stop; turn off the engine for at least 15 seconds; then start the engine again. If this message still comes on, it means there is a problem. You should see your dealer/retailer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive, however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak, so reduce your speed and drive accordingly. SERVICE SUSPENSION SYSTEM If your vehicle has the Autoride ® suspension system, this message displays when the Autoride suspension system is not operating properly. Have your vehicle servi[...]

  • Страница 259

    SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays and a chime sounds when there is a problem with the ITBC system. When this message displays, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. As soon as it is safe to do so, carefully pull your vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If this message still displays, either your vehicle or the trailer needs service. See your dealer/retailer. See “Integrated Trailer Brake Control System” under Towing a Trailer on page 4-50 for more information. SIDE BLIND ZONE ALERT SYSTEM [...]

  • Страница 260

    There are several conditions that can cause this message to appear. • One condition is overheating, which could occur if StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended period of time. • The message also displays if the brake system warning light is on. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40 . • The message could display if the stability system takes longer than usual to complete its diagnostic checks due to driving conditions. • The message displays if an engine or vehicle related problem has been detected and the vehicle needs service. See your dealer/retailer. • The message also displays if the vehicle is shifted into 4LO. The message turns off as soon as the conditions [...]

  • Страница 261

    TRACTION CONTROL OFF If your vehicle has StabiliTrak, this message displays when the Traction Control System (TCS) is turned off. Adjust your driving accordingly. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 for more information. TRAILER CONNECTED On vehicles with the Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system, this message displays briefly when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message clears itself after several seconds. This message also clears if you acknowledge it. After this message clears, the TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT display appears in the DIC. See “TRAILER GAIN/OUTPUT” under DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 or DIC Operatio[...]

  • Страница 262

    WASHER FLUID LOW ADD FLUID This message displays when the windshield washer fluid is low. Fill the windshield washer fluid reservoir as soon as possible. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the windshield washer fluid reservoir. Also, see Windshield Washer Fluid on page 5-39 for more information. DIC Vehicle Customization (With DIC Buttons) Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that allow you to program certain features to one preferred setting. Customization features can only be programmed to one setting on the vehicle and cannot be programmed to a preferred setting for two different drivers. All of the customization options may not be available on[...]

  • Страница 263

    DISPLAY LANGUAGE This feature allows you to select the language in which the DIC messages will appear. Press the customization button until the DISPLAY LANGUAGE screen appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: ENGLISH (default): All messages will appear in English. FRANCAIS: All messages will appear in French. ESPANOL: All messages will appear in Spanish. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. You can also change th[...]

  • Страница 264

    AUTO DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select whether or not to turn off the automatic door unlocking feature. It also allows you to select which doors and when the doors will automatically unlock. See Programmable Automatic Door Locks on page 2-11 for more information. Press the customization button until AUTO DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: None of the doors will automatically unlock. DRIVER AT KEY OUT: Only the driver’s door will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition. DRIVER IN PARK: Only the driver’s door w[...]

  • Страница 265

    NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK This feature allows you to select the type of feedback you will receive when unlocking the vehicle with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. You will not receive feedback when unlocking the vehicle with the RKE transmitter if the doors are open. See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System Operation on page 2-5 for more information. Press the customization button until REMOTE DOOR UNLOCK appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then p[...]

  • Страница 266

    EXIT LIGHTING This feature allows you to select the amount of time you want the exterior lamps to remain on when it is dark enough outside. This happens after the key is turned from ON/RUN to LOCK/OFF. Press the customization button until EXIT LIGHTING appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF: The exterior lamps will not turn on. 30 SECONDS (default): The exterior lamps will stay on for 30 seconds. 1 MINUTE: The exterior lamps will stay on for one minute. 2 MINUTES: The exterior lamps will stay on for two minutes. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to t[...]

  • Страница 267

    CHIME VOLUME This feature allows you to select the volume level of the chime. Press the customization button until CHIME VOLUME appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: NORMAL: The chime volume will be set to a normal level. LOUD: The chime volume will be set to a loud level. NO CHANGE: No change will be made to this feature. The current setting will remain. There is no default for chime volume. The volume will stay at the last known setting. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. PARK TILT MIRROR[...]

  • Страница 268

    EASY EXIT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the automatic easy exit seat feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information. Press the customization button until EASY EXIT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: DOOR BUTTON ONLY: No automatic seat exit recall will occur. The recall will only occur after pressing the easy exit seat button. BUTTON & KEY OUT (default): If the features are enabled through the EASY EXIT SETUP menu, the driver’s seat will move back when [...]

  • Страница 269

    MEMORY SEAT RECALL If your vehicle has this feature, it allows you to select your preference for the remote memory seat recall feature. See Memory Seat, Mirrors, and Pedals on page 1-8 for more information. Press the customization button until MEMORY SEAT RECALL appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: OFF (default): No remote memory seat recall will occur. ON: The driver’s seat and, on some vehicles, the outside mirrors will automatically move to the stored driving position when the unlock button on the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter is pressed.[...]

  • Страница 270

    FACTORY SETTINGS This feature allows you to set all of the customization features back to their factory default settings. Press the customization button until FACTORY SETTINGS appears on the DIC display. Press the set/reset button once to access the settings for this feature. Then press the customization button to scroll through the following settings: RESTORE ALL (default): The customization features will be set to their factory default settings. DO NOT RESTORE: The customization features will not be set to their factory default settings. To select a setting, press the set/reset button while the desired setting is displayed on the DIC. EXIT FEATURE SETTINGS This feature allows you to exit t[...]

  • Страница 271

    Audio System(s) Determine which radio the vehicle has and read the following pages to become familiar with its features. { CAUTION: Taking your eyes off the road for extended periods could cause a crash resulting in injury or death to you or others. Do not give extended attention to entertainment tasks while driving. This system provides access to many audio and non audio listings. To minimize taking your eyes off the road while driving, do the following while the vehicle is parked: • Become familiar with the operation and controls of the audio system. • Set up the tone, speaker adjustments, and preset radio stations. For more information, see Defensive Driving on page 4-2 . Notice: Cont[...]

  • Страница 272

    Setting the Clock MP3 Radios with a Single CD or a Single CD and DVD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a single CD or a CD and DVD player, it has a H (clock) button for setting the time and date. To set the time and date: 1. Press the H button and the HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. 2. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one. • Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the FWD (forward) button. • To decrease the time or date, press the left © SEEK arrow or the s REV (reverse) butto[...]

  • Страница 273

    MP3 Radio with a Six-Disc CD Player If the vehicle has a radio with a six-disc CD player, the radio has a MENU button instead of the H (clock) button to set the time and date. To set the time and date: 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Once the H (clock) option displays, press the pushbutton located under that label. The HR, MIN, MM, DD, YYYY (hour, minute, month, day, and year) displays. 3. Press the pushbutton located under any one of the labels to change it. Every time the pushbutton is pressed again, the time or the date if selected, increases by one. • Another way to increase the time or date, is to press the right ¨ SEEK arrow or the FWD (forward) button. • To decrease the time or da[...]

  • Страница 274

    Radio(s) The vehicle has one of these radios as its audio system. Radio with CD shown, Radio with Six-Disc CD similar Radio with CD and DVD 3-86[...]

  • Страница 275

    Radios with CD and DVD Radios with CD and DVD have a Bose ® Surround Sound System. Some of its features are explained later in this section under, “Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)”. If the vehicle has a Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, it has a CD/DVD radio. See Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 The DVD player is the top slot on the radio faceplate. The player is capable of reading the DTS programmed DVD Audio or DVD Video media, (DTS and DTS Digital Surround are registered trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.). Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Radio Data System (RDS[...]

  • Страница 276

    Noise Compensation Technology: Vehicles with The LTZ package and a Bose ® Audio System include the Bose AudioPilot ® noise compensation technology. When turned on, AudioPilot ® continuously adjusts the audio system equalization, to compensate for background noise, so that music always sounds the same at the set volume level. This feature is most effective at lower radio volume settings where background noise can affect how well the music is heard. At higher volume settings, where the music is much louder than the background noise, there might be little or no adjustments by AudioPilot ® . To activate: 1. Set the radio volume to the desired level. 2. Press the MENU button to display the ra[...]

  • Страница 277

    Storing a Radio Station as a Favorite Drivers are encouraged to set up their radio station favorites while the vehicle is stopped. Tune to favorite stations using the presets, favorites button, and steering wheel controls, if the vehicle has this feature. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2 . FAV (Favorites): A maximum of 36 stations can be programmed as favorites using the six pushbuttons positioned below the radio station frequency labels and by using the radio favorites page button (FAV button). Press the FAV button to go through up to six pages of favorites, each having six favorite stations available per page. Each page of favorites can contain any combination of AM, FM, or XM (if equippe[...]

  • Страница 278

    Setting the Tone (Bass/Midrange/Treble) BASS/MID/TREB (Bass, Midrange, or Treble): To adjust bass, midrange, or treble, press the f knob until the tone control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow, FWD (forward), or s REV (reverse) button until the desired levels are obtained. If a station’s frequency is weak or if there is static, decrease the treble. To quickly adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the [...]

  • Страница 279

    Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade) BAL/FADE (Balance/Fade): To adjust balance or fade, press the f knob until the speaker control labels display. Continue pressing to highlight the desired label, or press the pushbutton positioned under the desired label. Turn the f knob clockwise or counterclockwise to adjust the highlighted setting. Adjust the highlighted setting by pressing either SEEK arrow, FWD, or s REV button until the desired levels are obtained. To quickly adjust balance or fade to the middle position, press the pushbutton positioned under the BAL or FADE label for more than two seconds. A beep sounds and the level adjusts to the middle position. To quickly adjust all speaker a[...]

  • Страница 280

    Undesired XM categories can be removed through the setup menu. To remove an undesired category: 1. Press the MENU button to display the radio setup menu. 2. Press the pushbutton located below the XM CAT label. 3. Turn the f knob to display the category to be removed. 4. Press the pushbutton located under the Remove label until the category name along with the word Removed displays. 5. Repeat the steps to remove more categories. Removed categories can be restored by pressing the pushbutton under the Add label when a removed category is displayed or by pressing the pushbutton under the Restore All label. Categories cannot be removed or added while the vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph (8 km/[...]

  • Страница 281

    Radio Messages for XM Only See XM Radio Messages on page 3-114 later in this section for further detail. Playing a CD (Single CD Player) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing. Playing a CD(s) (Six-Disc CD Player) LOAD ^ : Press this button to load CDs into the CD player. This CD player holds up to six CDs. To insert one CD: 1. Press and release the ^ button. 2. Wait for the message to insert the disc. 3. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls the CD in. To insert multiple CDs: 1. Press and hold the ^ button for two seconds. A beep sounds and Load All Discs displays. 2. Follow the displ[...]

  • Страница 282

    Playing a CD (In Either the DVD or CD Slot) Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up. The player pulls it in and the CD should begin playing in 5 to 20 seconds for a CD, and in 30 seconds for a DVD, depending on media type and format ranges. If the ignition or radio is turned off, while a CD is in the player, it stays in the player. When the ignition or radio is turned on, the CD starts playing where it stopped, if it was the last selected audio source. The CD is controlled by the buttons on the radio faceplate or by the RSA unit. See Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-136 for more information. The DVD/CD decks, (upper slot is the DVD deck and the lower slot is the CD deck) of the radio[...]

  • Страница 283

    Care of the CD and DVD Player Do not add any label to a CD. It could get caught in the CD or DVD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of the recorded CD with a marking pen. The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised, due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics with lubricants internal to the CD and DVD player mechanism. Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more than one CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or an attempt is made to play scratched or damaged CDs, the CD player could be damaged. While using the CD player, use only CDs in good condition without any label, load one CD at a time, and[...]

  • Страница 284

    s REV (Fast Reverse): Press and hold to reverse playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release this pushbutton to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold to advance playback quickly within a track. Sound is heard at a reduced volume. Release to resume playing the track. The elapsed time of the track displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, the tracks can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To use random: • Press the CD/AUX button, or for a single CD player, insert a disc partway into the slot of the CD player. A RDM label displays. To play the tracks from the single CD i[...]

  • Страница 285

    CD/AUX (CD/Auxiliary): Press to play a CD while listening to the radio. The CD icon and a message showing the disc and/or track number displays when a CD is in the player. Press again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Input Device Found” displays. DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing the track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portab[...]

  • Страница 286

    Playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with a Single CD or a Six-Disc CD player have the capability of playing an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3 CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. Playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW Disc Radios with a CD and DVD player have the capability of playing an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc. For more information on how to play an MP3/WMA CD-R or CD-RW disc, see “Using an MP3” in the index. CD Messages CHECK DISC: Radios with a Single CD player or radios with a Six-Disc player displays CHECK DISC and/or ejects the CD if an error occurs. Radios with a CD and DVD player could display other messages when an error [...]

  • Страница 287

    Using the DVD Player The DVD player is controlled by the buttons on the remote control, or by the RSA system, or by the buttons on the radio faceplate. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 and Rear Seat Audio (RSA) on page 3-136 for more information. The DVD player is only compatible with DVDs of the appropriate region code that is printed on the jacket of most DVDs. The DVD slot of the radio is compatible with most audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, DVD-R/RW, DVD+R/RW media along with MP3 and WMA formats. If an error message displays on the video screen or the radio, see “DVD Display Error Messages” under, Rear Seat Entertainment [...]

  • Страница 288

    O (Power): Press to turn the radio on or off. Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume. Press and hold for more than two seconds to turn off the radio and Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system, and to start the parental control feature. Parental control prevents the rear seat occupant from operating the Rear Seat Audio (RSA) system or remote control. A lock symbol displays next to the clock display. The parental control feature remains on until this knob is pressed and held for more than two seconds again, or until the driver turns the ignition off and exits the vehicle. f (Tune): Turn to change tracks on a CD or DVD, to manually tune a radio station, or to change[...]

  • Страница 289

    DVD-V (Video) Display Buttons Once a DVD-V is inserted, the radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for more information. The rear seat passenger can navigate the DVD-V menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 for more information. The Video Screen automatically turns on when the DVD-V is inserted into the DVD slot. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon displayed on the radio system, to toggle between pausing or restarting playback of a DVD. If the forw[...]

  • Страница 290

    DVD-A (Audio) Display Buttons Once a DVD-A is inserted, radio display menu shows several tag options for DVD playing. Press the pushbuttons located under any desired tag option during DVD playback. See the tag options listed after, for more information. The rear seat operator can navigate the DVD-A menus and controls through the remote control. See “Remote Control”, under Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System on page 3-127 for more information. The Video Screen does not automatically power on when the DVD-A is inserted into the DVD slot. It must be manually turned on by the rear seat occupant through the remote control power button. r / j (Play/Pause): Press either the play or pause icon [...]

  • Страница 291

    Stopping and Resuming Playback To stop playing a DVD without turning off the system, press the c button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the stop or the play/pause symbol tags displayed on the radio. If the radio head is sourced to something other than DVD-V, press the DVD/CD AUX button to make DVD-V the active source. To resume DVD playback, press the r / j button on the remote control, or press the pushbutton located under the play/pause symbol tag displayed on the radio. The DVD should resume play from where it last stopped if the disc has not been ejected and the stop button has not been pressed twice on the remote control. If the disc has been ejected or the [...]

  • Страница 292

    To use a portable audio player, connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) cable to the radio’s front auxiliary input jack. When a device is connected, press the radio CD/AUX button to begin playing audio from the device over the vehicle speakers. For optimal sound quality, increase the portable audio device’s volume to the loudest level. It is always best to power the portable audio device through its own battery while playing. O (Power/Volume): Turn clockwise or counterclockwise to increase or decrease the volume of the portable player. Additional volume adjustments might have to be made from the portable device if the volume is not loud or soft enough. BAND: Press to listen to the radio when a porta[...]

  • Страница 293

    Using an MP3 (Radio with CD or Six-Disc CD Player) MP3 CD-R or CD-RW Disc The radio plays MP3 files that were recorded on a CD-R or CD-RW disc. The files can be recorded with the following fixed bit rates: 32 kbps, 40 kbps, 56 kbps, 64 kbps, 80 kbps, 96 kbps, 112 kbps, 128 kbps, 160 kbps, 192 kbps, 224 kbps, 256 kbps, and 320 kbps or a variable bit rate. Song title, artist name, and album are available for display by the radio when recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2. Compressed Audio The radio also plays discs that contain both uncompressed CD audio (.CDA files) and MP3 files. By default the radio shows the MP3 label on the left side of the screen but plays both file formats in th[...]

  • Страница 294

    Playlists can be changed by using the S c (previous) and c T (next) folder buttons, the f knob, or the © SEEK ¨ arrows. MP3 CD-R or CD-RW that have been recorded without using file folders can be played. If a CD-R or CD-RW contains more than the maximum of 50 folders, 15 playlists, and 512 folders and files, the player allows access and navigates up to the maximum, but all items over the maximum are not accessible. Root Directory The root directory of the CD-R or CD-RW is treated as a folder. If the root directory has compressed audio files, the directory displays as the CD label. All files contained directly under the root directory are accessed prior to any root directory folders. Ho[...]

  • Страница 295

    File System and Naming The song name that displays is the song name that is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name is not present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displays the file name without the extension (such as .mp3) as the track name. Track names longer than 32 characters or four pages are shortened. Parts of words on the last page of text and the extension of the filename does not display. Preprogrammed Playlists Preprogrammed playlists that were created using WinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™ software can be accessed, however, they cannot be edited using the radio. These playlists are treated as special folders containing compressed audio song files. Playing an MP3 I[...]

  • Страница 296

    s REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button to reverse playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. FWD (Fast Forward): Press and hold this button to advance playback quickly within an MP3 file. Sound will be heard at a reduced volume. Release this button to resume playing the file. The elapsed time of the file displays. RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3 files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order, on one CD-R or CD-RW or all discs in a six-disc CD player. To use random, do one of the following: 1. To play MP3 fil[...]

  • Страница 297

    To change from playback by artist to playback by album, press the pushbutton located below the Sort By label. From the sort screen, push one of the buttons below the album button. Press the pushbutton below the back label to return to the main music navigator screen. Now the album name is displayed on the second line between the arrows and songs from the current album begins to play. Once all songs from that album are played, the player moves to the next album in alphabetical order on the CD-R or CD-RW and begins playing MP3 files from that album. To exit music navigator mode, press the pushbutton below the Back label to return to normal MP3 playback. BAND: Press this button to listen to th[...]

  • Страница 298

    • Create a folder structure that makes it easy to find songs while driving. Organize songs by albums using one folder for each album. Each folder or album should contain 18 songs or less. • Avoid subfolders. The system can support up to eight subfolders deep, however, keep the total number of folders to a minimum in order to reduce the complexity and confusion in trying to locate a particular folder during playback. • Make sure playlists have a .m3u extension as other file extensions might not work. • Minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlist names. Long file, folder, or playlist names, or a combination of a large number of files and folders, or playlists could cause [...]

  • Страница 299

    Order of Play Tracks recorded to the CD-R or CD-RW are played in the following order: • Play begins from the first track in the first playlist and continues sequentially through all tracks in each playlist. When the last track of the last playlist has played, play continues from the first track of the first playlist. • Play begins from the first track in the first folder and continues sequentially through all tracks in each folder. When the last track of the last folder has played, play continues from the first track of the first folder. When play enters a new folder, the display does not automatically show the new folder name unless folder mode has been chosen as the default dis[...]

  • Страница 300

    Z CD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the bottom slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Disc displays. Once the disc is ejected, Remove Disc displays. The CD-R or CD-RW can be removed. If the CD-R or CD-RW is not removed, after several seconds, the CD-R or CD-RW automatically pulls back into the player. If loading and reading of a CD cannot be completed, such as unknown format, etc., and the disc fails to eject, press and hold this button for more than five seconds to force the disc to eject. Z DVD (Eject): Press and release this button to eject the CD-R or CD-RW that is currently playing in the top slot. A beep sounds and Ejecting Dis[...]

  • Страница 301

    RDM (Random): With the random setting, MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW can be listened to in random, rather than sequential order. To play MP3/WMA files from the CD-R or CD-RW in random order, press the pushbutton positioned under the RDM label until Random Current Disc displays. Press the same pushbutton again to turn off random play. h (Music Navigator): Use the music navigator feature to play MP3/WMA files on the CD-R or CD-RW in order by artist or album. Press the pushbutton located below the music navigator label. The player scans the disc to sort the files by artist and album ID3 tag information. It could take several minutes to scan the disc depending on the number of MP3/WMA ?[...]

  • Страница 302

    BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a CD or a DVD is playing. The CD or DVD remains inside the radio for future listening or viewing entertainment. DVD/CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to cycle through DVD, CD, or Auxiliary when listening to the radio. The DVD/CD text label and a message showing track or chapter number displays when a disc is in either slot. Press this button again and the system automatically searches for an auxiliary input device, such as a portable audio player. If a portable audio player is not connected, “No Aux Input Device” displays. If a disc is in both the DVD slot and the CD slot the DVD/CD AUX button cycles between the two sources and not [...]

  • Страница 303

    No Artist Info: No artist information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Title Info: No song title information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No CAT Info: No category information is available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. No Information: No text or informational messages are available at this time on this channel. The system is working properly. CAT Not Found: There are no channels available for the selected category. The system is working properly. XM Theftlocked: The XM receiver in the vehicle could have previously been in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM receive[...]

  • Страница 304

    Voice Recognition The Bluetooth system uses voice recognition to interpret voice commands to dial phone numbers and name tags. Noise: Keep interior noise levels to a minimum. The system may not recognize voice commands if there is too much background noise. When to Speak: A short tone sounds after the system responds indicating when it is waiting for a voice command. Wait until the tone and then speak. How to Speak: Speak clearly in a calm and natural voice. Audio System When using the in-vehicle Bluetooth system, sound comes through the vehicle’s front audio system speakers and overrides the audio system. Use the audio system volume knob, during a call, to change the volume level. The adj[...]

  • Страница 305

    Pairing Information: • Up to five cell phones can be paired to the in-vehicle Bluetooth system. • The pairing process is disabled when the vehicle is moving. • The in-vehicle Bluetooth system automatically links with the first available paired cell phone in the order the phone was paired. • Only one paired cell phone can be connected to the in-vehicle Bluetooth system at a time. • Pairing should only need to be completed once, unless changes to the pairing information have been made or the phone is deleted. To link to a different paired phone, see Linking to a Different Phone later in this section. Pairing a Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with ?[...]

  • Страница 306

    Listing All Paired and Connected Phones 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say “List”. The system lists all the paired Bluetooth devices. If a phone is connected to the vehicle, the system will say “Is connected” after the connected phone. Deleting a Paired Phone 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Delete”. The system asks which phone to delete followed by a tone. 4. Say [...]

  • Страница 307

    Using the Store Command The store command allows a phone number to be stored without entering the digits individually. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Store”. The system responds with “Store, number please” followed by a tone. 3. Say the complete phone number to be stored at once with no pauses. • If the system recognizes the number it responds with “OK, Storing” and repeats the phone number. • If the system is unsure it recognizes the phone number, it responds with “Store” and repeats the number followed by “Please say yes or no”. If the number is correct, say “Yes”. If the number is not corr[...]

  • Страница 308

    4. After the complete number has been entered, say “Store”. The system responds with “Please say the name tag” followed by a tone. 5. Say a name tag for the phone number. The name tag is recorded and the system responds with “About to store <name tag>. Does that sound OK?”. • If the name tag does not sound correct, say “No” and repeat Step 5. • If the name tag sounds correct, say “Yes” and the name tag is stored. After the number is stored the system returns to the main menu. Using the Directory Command The directory command lists all of the name tags stored by the system. To use the directory command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds w[...]

  • Страница 309

    Using the Delete All Name Tags Command The delete all name tags command deletes all stored phone book name tags and route name tags for OnStar (if present). To use the delete all name tags command: 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Delete all name tags”. The system responds with “You are about to delete all name tags stored in your phone directory and your route destination directory. Are you sure you want to do this? Please say yes or no.” • Say “Yes” to delete all name tags. • Say “No” to cancel the function and return to the main menu. Making a Call Calls can be made using the following commands: •[...]

  • Страница 310

    Using the Digit Dial Command 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Digit Dial”. The system responds with “Digit dial using <phone name>, please say the first digit to dial” followed by a tone. 3. Say the digit to be dialed one at a time. Following each digit, the system will repeat back the digit it heard followed by a tone. 4. Continue entering digits until the number to be dialed is complete. After the whole number has been entered, say “Dial”. The system responds with “OK, Dialing” and dials the number. • If an unwanted number is recognized by the system, say “Clear” at any time to clear the las[...]

  • Страница 311

    Receiving a Call When an incoming call is received, the audio system mutes and a ring tone is heard in the vehicle. • Press b g and begin speaking to answer the call. • Press c x to ignore a call. Call Waiting Call waiting must be supported on the Bluetooth phone and enabled by the wireless service carrier to work. • Press b g to answer an incoming call when another call is active. The original call is placed on hold. • Press b g again to return to the original call. • To ignore the incoming call, continue with the original call with no action. • Press c x to disconnect the current call and switch to the call on hold. Three-Way Calling Three-Way Calling must be supported on the B[...]

  • Страница 312

    Muting a Call During a call, all sounds from inside the vehicle can be muted so that the person on the other end of the call cannot hear them. To Mute a call 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Call muted”. To Cancel Mute 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. After the tone, say “Mute Call”. The system responds with “Resuming call”. Transferring a Call Audio can be transferred between the in-vehicle Bluetooth system and the cell phone. To Transfer Audio to the Cell Phone During a call with the audio in the vehicle: 1. Press b g . The system responds with “R[...]

  • Страница 313

    Voice Pass-Thru Voice Pass-Thru allows access to the voice recognition commands on the cell phone. See the cell phone manufacturers user guide to see if the cell phone supports this feature. This feature can be used to verbally access contacts stored in the cell phone. 1. Press and hold b g for two seconds. The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Bluetooth”. The system responds with “Bluetooth ready” followed by a tone. 3. Say “Voice”. The system responds with “OK, accessing <phone name>”. • The cell phone’s normal prompt messages will go through its cycle according to the phone’s operating instructions. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) To[...]

  • Страница 314

    Sending a Stored Name Tag During a Call 1. Press b g . The system responds with “Ready” followed by a tone. 2. Say “Send name tag.” The system responds with “Say a name tag to send tones” followed by a tone. 3. Say the name tag to send. • If the system clearly recognizes the name tag it responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call continues. • If the system is not sure it recognized the name tag properly, it responds “Dial <name tag>, Please say yes or no?” followed by a tone. If the name tag is correct, say “Yes”. The system responds with “OK, Sending <name tag>” and the dial tones are sent and the call con[...]

  • Страница 315

    Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) System The vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE) system. The RSE system works with the vehicle’s audio system. The DVD player is part of the front radio. The RSE system includes a radio with a DVD player, a video display screen, audio/video jacks, two wireless headphones, a remote control, and if the vehicle has a third row seat, it may have a second video display screen and two additional wireless headphones. See Radio(s) on page 3-86 for more information on the vehicle’s audio/DVD system. Before Driving The RSE is designed for rear seat passengers only. The driver cannot safely view the video screen while driving and should not try to do so.[...]

  • Страница 316

    Headphones The RSE includes two 2-channel wireless headphones that are dedicated to this system. Channel 1 is dedicated to the DVD player, while Channel 2 is dedicated to RSA selections. These headphones are used to listen to media such as CDs, DVDs, MP3s, DVDAs, radio, any auxiliary source connected to A/V jacks, or the auxiliary input jack, if the vehicle has this feature. The wireless headphones have an On/Off button, channel 1/2 switch, and a volume control. If the vehicle has a third row video screen display, it may have two additional headphones. Push the power button to turn on the headphones. An indicator light located on the headphones comes on. If the light comes on but there is in[...]

  • Страница 317

    Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones and repairs will not be covered by the warranty. Storage in extreme cold can weaken the batteries. Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place. If the foam ear pads attached to the headphones become worn or damaged, the pads can be replaced separately from the headphone set. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Battery Replacement To change the batteries on the headphones: 1. Turn the screw to loosen the battery door located on the left side of the headphones. Slide the battery door open. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, u[...]

  • Страница 318

    To use the auxiliary inputs of the RSE system, connect an external auxiliary device to the color-coded A/V jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the video screen power on. If the video screen is in the DVD player mode, pressing the AUX (auxiliary) button on the remote control switches the video screen from the DVD player mode to the auxiliary device. The radio can listen to the audio of the connected auxiliary device by sourcing to auxiliary. See Radio(s) on page 3-86 for more information. How to Change the RSE Video Screen Settings The screen display mode (normal, full, and zoom), screen brightness, and setup menu language can be changed from the on screen setup menu. To change any f[...]

  • Страница 319

    Video Screen(s) The video screen(s) are located in the overhead console. To use the video screen(s): 1. Push the release button located on the overhead console. 2. Move the screen to the desired position. When the video screen is not in use, push it up into its locked position. If a DVD is playing and the screen is raised to its locked position, the screen remains on, this is normal, and the DVD continues to play through the previous audio source. Use the remote control power button or eject the disc to turn off the screen. The overhead console contains the infrared transmitters for the wireless headphones and the infrared receivers for the remote control. They are located at the rear of the[...]

  • Страница 320

    Remote Control Buttons O (Power): Press this button to turn the video screen on and off. P (Illumination): Press this button to turn the remote control backlight on. The backlight automatically turns off after seven to ten seconds if no other button is pressed while the backlight is on. v (Title): Press this button to return the DVD to the main menu of the DVD. This function may vary for each disc. y (Main Menu): Press this button to access the DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every DVD. Use the navigation arrows to move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making a selection press the enter button. This button only operates when using a DVD. n , q , p , o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Us[...]

  • Страница 321

    s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start playing a DVD. Press this button while a DVD is playing to pause it. Press it again to continue playing the DVD. On some radios, play may be slowed down by pressing the play/pause button then pressing the fast forward button when the DVD is playing. The DVD continues playing in a slow play mode. Some radios may perform reverse slow play by pressing the play/pause button and then pressing the fast reverse button. To cancel slow play mode, press the play/pause button. t (Previous Track/Chapter): Press this button to return to the start of the current track or chapter. Press this button again to go to the previous track or chapter. This button might no[...]

  • Страница 322

    (Clear): Press this button within three seconds after entering a numeric selection, to clear all numerical inputs. } 10 (Double Digit Entries): Press this button to select chapter or track numbers greater than nine. Press this button before entering the number. If the remote control becomes lost or damaged, a new universal remote control can be purchased. If this happens, make sure the universal remote control uses a code set of Toshiba ® . Battery Replacement To change the remote control batteries: 1. Slide the rear cover back on to the remote control. 2. Replace the two batteries in the compartment. Make sure that they are installed correctly, using the diagram on the inside of the batt[...]

  • Страница 323

    Problem Recommended Action The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliary source mode. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices. Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out or buzzes. Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range, and interference from cellular telephone towers or by using a cellular telephone in the vehicle. Check that the headphones are on correctly using the L (left) and R (right) on the headphones. I lost the remote and/or the headphones. See your dealer/retailer for assistance. The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced t[...]

  • Страница 324

    Cleaning the RSE Overhead Console When cleaning the RSE overhead console surface, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Cleaning the Video Screen When cleaning the video screen, use only a clean cloth dampened with clean water. Use care when directly touching or cleaning the screen, as damage could result. Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Vehicles with this feature allow the rear seat passengers to listen to and control any of the music sources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or other auxiliary sources. However, the rear seat passengers can only control the music sources the front seat passengers are not listening to (except on some radios where dual control is allowed). For example, rear seat passenger[...]

  • Страница 325

    SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between the radio (AM/FM), XM™ (if equipped), CD, and if the vehicle has these features, DVD, front auxiliary, and rear auxiliary. ©¨ (Seek): When listening to FM, AM, or XM™ (if equipped), press the left © or right ¨ seek arrow to go to the previous or to the next station or channel and stay there. This function is inactive, with some radios, if the front seat passengers are listening to the radio. Press and hold the left © or right ¨ seek arrow until the display flashes, to tune to an individual station. The display stops flashing after the buttons have not been pushed for more than two seconds. This function is inactive, with some rad[...]

  • Страница 326

    Theft-Deterrent Feature THEFTLOCK ® is designed to discourage theft of the vehicle’s radio by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). The radio does not operate if it is stolen or moved to a different vehicle. Audio Steering Wheel Controls Vehicles with audio steering wheel controls could differ depending on the vehicle’s options. Some audio controls can be adjusted at the steering wheel. w (Next): Press to go to the next radio station stored as a favorite, or the next track if a CD/DVD is playing. x c (Previous/End): Press to go to the previous radio station stored as a favorite, the next track if a CD/DVD is playing, to reject an incoming call, or end a current[...]

  • Страница 327

    ¨ (Seek): Press to go to the next radio station while in AM, FM, or XM™. Press ¨ to go to the next track or chapter while sourced to the CD or DVD slot. Press the ¨ if multiple discs are loaded to go to the next disc while sourced to a CD player. Radio Reception Frequency interference and static can occur during normal radio reception if items such as cell phone chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and external electronic devices are plugged into the accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static, unplug the item from the accessory power outlet. AM The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM, especially at night. The longer range can cause station frequencies[...]

  • Страница 328

    Rear Side Window Antenna The AM-FM antenna is located in the passenger rear side windows. Make sure the inside surfaces of the rear side windows are not scratched and that the lines on the glass are not damaged. If the inside surfaces are damaged, they could interfere with radio reception. If a cellular telephone antenna needs to be attached to the glass, make sure that the grid lines for the AM-FM antenna are not damaged. There is enough space between the grid lines to attach a cellular telephone antenna without interfering with radio reception. Notice: Using a razor blade or sharp object to clear the inside of the rear side windows may affect radio reception or damage the rear side window [...]

  • Страница 329

    Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle ........... .4-2 Driving for Better Fuel Economy ...................... .4-2 Defensive Driving .......................................... .4-2 Drunk Driving ................................................ .4-3 Control of a Vehicle ....................................... .4-3 Braking ........................................................ .4-4 Antilock Brake System (ABS) .......................... .4-5 Braking in Emergencies .................................. .4-6 StabiliTrak ® System ....................................... .4-6 Locking Rear Axle ......................................... .4-9 Steering .................................................[...]

  • Страница 330

    Your Driving, the Road, and the Vehicle Driving for Better Fuel Economy Driving habits can affect fuel mileage. Here are some driving tips to get the best fuel economy possible. • Avoid fast starts and accelerate smoothly. • Brake gradually and avoid abrupt stops. • Avoid idling the engine for long periods of time. • When road and weather conditions are appropriate, use cruise control, if equipped. • Always follow posted speed limits or drive more slowly when conditions require. • Keep vehicle tires properly inflated. • Combine several trips into a single trip. • Replace the vehicle’s tires with the same TPC Spec number molded into the tire’s sidewall near the size. • [...]

  • Страница 331

    Drunk Driving { CAUTION: Drinking and then driving is very dangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking. Do not drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a cab; or if you are with a group, designate a driver who will not drink. Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is a global tragedy. Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive a vehicle: judgment, muscular coordination, vision, and attentiveness. Police records show that almost 40 percent of all motor vehicle-related deaths inv[...]

  • Страница 332

    Braking If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-40 . Braking action involves perception time and reaction time. Deciding to push the brake pedal is perception time. Actually doing it is reaction time. Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a second. But that is only an average. It might be less with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness, coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels 66 feet (20 m). That could[...]

  • Страница 333

    Antilock Brake System (ABS) This vehicle has the Antilock Brake System (ABS), an advanced electronic braking system that helps prevent a braking skid. When the engine is started and the vehicle begins to drive away, ABS checks itself. A momentary motor or clicking noise might be heard while this test is going on. This is normal. If there is a problem with ABS, this warning light stays on. See Antilock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light on page 3-41 . Along with ABS, the vehicle has a Dynamic Rear Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem, both the brake and ABS warning lights come on accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights and chime will come on each time the ignition is turne[...]

  • Страница 334

    Braking in Emergencies ABS allows the driver to steer and brake at the same time. In many emergencies, steering can help more than even the very best braking. Brake Assist This vehicle has a Brake Assist feature designed to assist the driver in stopping or decreasing vehicle speed in emergency driving conditions. This feature uses the stability system hydraulic brake control module to supplement the power brake system under conditions where the driver has quickly and forcefully applied the brake pedal in an attempt to quickly stop or slow down the vehicle. The stability system hydraulic brake control module increases brake pressure at each corner of the vehicle until the ABS activates. Minor[...]

  • Страница 335

    If the system fails to turn on or activate, the StabiliTrak light along with one of the following messages will be displayed on the Driver Information Center (DIC): TRACTION CONTROL OFF, SERVICE TRACTION CONTROL, STABILITRAK OFF, SERVICE STABILITRAK. If these DIC messages appear, make sure the StabiliTrak system has not been turned off using the StabiliTrak on/off button. Then turn the steering wheel clockwise from the nine o’clock position to the three o’clock position. If this clears the message(s), the vehicle does not need servicing. If this does not clear the message(s), then turn the vehicle off, wait 15 seconds, and then turn it back on again to reset the system. If any of these m[...]

  • Страница 336

    It is recommended to leave the system on for normal driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn the system off if the vehicle is stuck in sand, mud, ice or snow, and you want to “rock” the vehicle to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 4-31 . Traction Control Operation The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak system. Traction control limits wheel spin by reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed management) and by applying brakes to each individual wheel (brake-traction control) as nece[...]

  • Страница 337

    Locking Rear Axle Vehicles with a locking rear axle can give more traction on snow, mud, ice, sand or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the time, but when traction is low, this feature will allow the rear wheel with the most traction to move the vehicle. Steering Power Steering If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If power steering assist is lost because the engine stops or the system is not functioning, the vehicle can be steered but it will take more effort. Steering Tips It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed. Traction in a curve depends on the condition of the tires and the road surface, the angle at which the[...]

  • Страница 338

    Steering in Emergencies There are times when steering can be more effective than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between parked cars and stops right in front of you. These problems can be avoided by braking — if you can stop in time. But sometimes you cannot stop in time because there is no room. That is the time for evasive action — steering around the problem. The vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like these. First, apply the brakes. See Braking on page 4-4 . It is better to remove as much speed as possible from a collision. Then steer around the problem, to[...]

  • Страница 339

    Of f-Road Recovery The vehicle’s right wheels can drop off the edge of a road onto the shoulder while driving. If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way, steer so that the vehicle straddles the edge of the pavement. Turn the steering wheel 3 to 5 inches, 8 to 13 cm, (about one-eighth turn) until the right front tire contacts the pavement edge. Then turn the steering wheel to go straight down the roadway. Passing Passing another vehicle on a two-lane road can be dangerous. To reduce the risk of danger while passing: • Look down the road, to the sides, and to crossroads[...]

  • Страница 340

    Skidding In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle. Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving those conditions. But skids are always possible. The three types of skids correspond to the vehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid, the wheels are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin. Remember: StabiliTrak ® helps avoid only the acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak ® System on page 4-6 . If the StabiliTrak ® System is off, th[...]

  • Страница 341

    Of f-Road Driving Vehicles with four-wheel drive can be used for off-road driving. Vehicles without four-wheel drive and vehicles with 20-inch tire/wheel assemblies should not be driven off-road except on a level, solid surface. The airbag system is designed to work properly under a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage. Always wear your safety belt and observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough terrain. Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any road and this is certainly true for off-road driving. At the very time you need special alertness and driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions, and judgment can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You could ha[...]

  • Страница 342

    To remove the air dam: 1. Remove the two outboard air dam bolts. 2. With a flat-blade tool, disengage the snaps. 3. After the bolts are removed and the snaps are disengaged, push forward on the air dam until it is free. Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended periods without the front fascia lower air dam installed can cause improper air flow to the engine. Always be sure to replace the front fascia air dam when you are finished off-road driving. After off-roading, be sure to reinstall the air dam: 1. Line up the snaps and push the air dam rearward to engage the snaps. 2. Install the two outboard bolts. Loading Your Vehicle for Of f-Road Driving { CAUTION: • Cargo on the load floor[...]

  • Страница 343

    There are some important things to remember about how to load your vehicle. • The heaviest things should be on the floor, forward of the rear axle. Put heavier items as far forward as you can. • Be sure the load is properly secured, so things are not tossed around. You will find other important information under Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 and Tires on page 5-61 . Environmental Concerns Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying recreation. However, it also raises environmental concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting the environment: • Always use established trails, roads, and areas that have been spec[...]

  • Страница 344

    Getting Familiar with Of f-Road Driving It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe and close to home before you go into the wilderness. Off-roading requires some new and dif ferent skills. Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your eyes need to constantly sweep the terrain for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen for unusual tire or engine sounds. Use your arms, hands, feet, and body to respond to vibrations and vehicle bounce. Controlling the vehicle is the key to successful off-road driving. One of the best ways to control the vehicle is to control the speed. At higher speeds: • You approach things faster and have less time to react. • There is less time [...]

  • Страница 345

    Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut, or bump can startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow, or even the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Some things to consider: • Is the path ahead clear? • Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead? • Does the travel take you uphill or downhill? • Will you have to stop suddenly or change direction quickly? When driving over obstacles or rough terrain, keep a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs, or other surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands. When driving over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles, the whee[...]

  • Страница 346

    Approaching a Hill When you approach a hill, decide if it is too steep to climb, descend, or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant incline with only a small change in elevation where you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top, but you might not see this because the crest of the hill is hidden by bushes, grass, or shrubs. Consider this as you approach a hill: • Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get sharply steeper in places? • Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the surface cause tire slipping? • Is there a straight path up or down [...]

  • Страница 347

    • Sound the horn as you approach the top of the hill to let opposing traff ic know you are there. • Use headlamps even during the day to make the vehicle more visible to oncoming traff ic. { CAUTION: Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed can cause an accident. There could be a drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another vehicle. You could be seriously injured or killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow down and stay alert. If the vehicle stalls, or is about to stall, and you cannot make it up the hill: • Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and keep it from rolling backwards and apply the parking brake. • If the engine is still running, shift the transmission to [...]

  • Страница 348

    If, after stalling, you try to back down the hill and decide you just cannot do it, set the parking brake, put your transmission in P (Park), and turn off the engine. Leave the vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer case to Neutral when you leave the vehicle. Leave it in some gear. { CAUTION: Shifting the transfer case to Neutral can cause your vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). This is because the Neutral position on the transfer case overrides the transmission. You or someone else could be injured. If you are going to leave your vehicle, set the parking br[...]

  • Страница 349

    { CAUTION: Heavy braking when going down a hill can cause your brakes to overheat and fade. This could cause loss of control and a serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly when descending a hill and use a low gear to keep vehicle speed under control. Things not to do when driving down a hill: • When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too steep to drive down might be too steep to drive across. The vehicle could roll over. • Never go downhill with the transmission in N (Neutral), called free-wheeling. The brakes will have to do all the work and could overheat and fade. Vehicles are much more likely to stall when going uphill, bu[...]

  • Страница 350

    Driving Across an Incline An off-road trail will probably go across the incline of a hill. To decide whether to try to drive across the incline, consider the following: { CAUTION: Driving across an incline that is too steep will make your vehicle roll over. You could be seriously injured or killed. If you have any doubt about the steepness of the incline, do not drive across it. Find another route instead. • A hill that can be driven straight up or down might be too steep to drive across. When going straight up or down a hill, the length of the wheel base — the distance from the front wheels to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood the vehicle will tumble end over end. But when driv[...]

  • Страница 351

    Stalling on an Incline { CAUTION: Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous. If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high) side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the rollover path. If the vehicle stalls when crossing an incline, be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open. If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle starts to roll over, you will be right in its path. If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path the vehicle will take if it does roll over. Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow, or Ice When you drive in mud, sno[...]

  • Страница 352

    Driving in Water { CAUTION: Driving through rushing water can be dangerous. Deep water can sweep your vehicle downstream and you and your passengers could drown. If it is only shallow water, it can still wash away the ground from under your tires, and you could lose traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not drive through rushing water. Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters demand extreme caution. Find out how deep the water is before driving through it. Do not try it if it is deep enough to cover the wheel hubs, axles, or exhaust pipe — you probably will not get through. Deep water can damage the axle and other vehicle parts. If the water is not too deep, drive slowly th[...]

  • Страница 353

    Driving at Night Night driving is more dangerous than day driving because some drivers are likely to be impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision problems, or by fatigue. Night driving tips include: • Drive defensively. • Do not drink and drive. • Reduce headlamp glare by adjusting the inside rearview mirror. • Slow down and keep more space between you and other vehicles because headlamps can only light up so much road ahead. • Watch for animals. • When tired, pull off the road. • Do not wear sunglasses. • Avoid staring directly into approaching headlamps. • Keep the windshield and all glass on your vehicle clean — inside and out. • Keep your eyes moving, espe[...]

  • Страница 354

    Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads Rain and wet roads can reduce vehicle traction and affect your ability to stop and accelerate. Always drive slower in these types of driving conditions and avoid driving through large puddles and deep-standing or flowing water. { CAUTION: Wet brakes can cause crashes. They might not work as well in a quick stop and could cause pulling to one side. You could lose control of the vehicle. After driving through a large puddle of water or a car/vehicle wash, lightly apply the brake pedal until the brakes work normally. Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces. Driving through flowing water could cause your vehicle to be carried away. If this happens, you a[...]

  • Страница 355

    Before Leaving on a Long Trip To prepare your vehicle for a long trip, consider having it serviced by your dealer/retailer before departing. Things to check on your own include: • Windshield Washer Fluid: Reservoir full? Windows clean — inside and outside? • Wiper Blades: In good shape? • Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: All levels checked? • Lamps: Do they all work and are lenses clean? • Tires: Are treads good? Are tires inflated to recommended pressure? • Weather and Maps: Safe to travel? Have up-to-date maps? Highway Hypnosis Always be alert and pay attention to your surroundings while driving. If you become tired or sleepy, find a safe place to park your vehicle and rest.[...]

  • Страница 356

    Hill and Mountain Roads Driving on steep hills or through mountains is different than driving on flat or rolling terrain. Tips for driving in these conditions include: • Keep the vehicle serviced and in good shape. • Check all fluid levels and brakes, tires, cooling system, and transmission. • Going down steep or long hills, shift to a lower gear. { CAUTION: If you do not shift down, the brakes could get so hot that they would not work well. You would then have poor braking or even none going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down to let the engine assist the brakes on a steep downhill slope. { CAUTION: Coasting downhill in N (Neutral) or with the ignition off is dangerous. The bra[...]

  • Страница 357

    Winter Driving Driving on Snow or Ice Drive carefully when there is snow or ice between the tires and the road, creating less traction or grip. Wet ice can occur at about 32°F (0°C) when freezing rain begins to fall, resulting in even less traction. Avoid driving on wet ice or in freezing rain until roads can be treated with salt or sand. Drive with caution, whatever the condition. Accelerate gently so traction is not lost. Accelerating too quickly causes the wheels to spin and makes the surface under the tires slick, so there is even less traction. Try not to break the fragile traction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheels will spin and polish the surface under the tires even more[...]

  • Страница 358

    Blizzard Conditions Being stuck in snow can be in a serious situation. Stay with the vehicle unless there is help nearby. If possible, use the Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . To get help and keep everyone in the vehicle safe: • Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6 . • Tie a red cloth to an outside mirror. { CAUTION: Snow can trap engine exhaust under the vehicle. This may cause exhaust gases to get inside. Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide (CO) which cannot be seen or smelled. It can cause unconsciousness and even death. If the vehicle is stuck in the snow: • Clear away snow from around the base of your vehicle, especially any that is blocking the exhaust pip[...]

  • Страница 359

    To save fuel, run the engine for only short periods as needed to warm the vehicle and then shut the engine off and close the window most of the way to save heat. Repeat this until help arrives but only when you feel really uncomfortable from the cold. Moving about to keep warm also helps. If it takes some time for help to arrive, now and then when you run the engine, push the accelerator pedal slightly so the engine runs faster than the idle speed. This keeps the battery charged to restart the vehicle and to signal for help with the headlamps. Do this as little as possible to save fuel. If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow Slowly and cautiously spin the wheels to free the vehi[...]

  • Страница 360

    Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out Turn the steering wheel left and right to clear the area around the front wheels. For four-wheel-drive vehicles, shift into Four-Wheel High or Four-Wheel Low. For vehicles with StabiliTrak ® , turn the traction control part of the system off. Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and a forward gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. To prevent transmission wear, wait until the wheels stop spinning before shifting gears. Release the accelerator pedal while shifting, and press lightly on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is in gear. Slowly spinning the wheels in the forward and reverse directions causes a rocking motion that could free [...]

  • Страница 361

    Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it would not be covered by warranty. For vehicles with recovery hooks at the front of the vehicle, you can use them if you are stuck off-road and need to be pulled to some place where you can continue driving. Loading the Vehicle It is very important to know how much weight your vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants, cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and the Certification/Tire label. { CAUTION: Do not load the ve[...]

  • Страница 362

    Tire and Loading Information Label A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s door open, you will find the label attached below the door lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms and pounds. The Tire and Loading Information label also shows the size of the original equipment tires (C) and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D). For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on page 5-61 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 . There is also important loading informa[...]

  • Страница 363

    4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs). 5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4. 6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of you[...]

  • Страница 364

    Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 2 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 = 750 lbs (136 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 250 lbs (113 kg) Item Description Total A Vehicle Capacity Weight for Example 3 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) B Subtract Occupant Weight 200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg) C Available Cargo Weight = 0 lbs (0 kg) Example 2 Example 3 4-36[...]

  • Страница 365

    Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity weight and seating positions. The combined weight of the driver, passengers, and cargo should never exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight. Certification/Tire Label A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel, and cargo. The Certification/Tire label also tells [...]

  • Страница 366

    The Certification/Tire label also contains information about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity. And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread it out. { CAUTION: Do not load the vehicle any heavier than the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on the vehicle can break, and it can change the way your vehicle handles. These could cause you to lose control and crash. Also, overloading can shorten the life of the vehicle. Notice : Overloading your vehicle may cause damage. Repairs would not be covered by your warranty. Do not overload your vehicle. The label will help you decide how much cargo and installed[...]

  • Страница 367

    Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are some things you will need to know: Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow plow prep package, adding a plow can damage your vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered by warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to carry a snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle. If your vehicle has the snow plow prep package, called RPO VYU, then the payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced when a snow plow is installed. Your vehicle can be damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or the Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) are exceeded. Some vehicles are built with a special snow plow prep package,[...]

  • Страница 368

    Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow plow on your vehicle: • Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles does not exceed the axle rating for each. • For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast must be properly secured so it will not move during driving. • Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear ballast may be required to ensure a proper front and rear weight distribution ratio, even though the actual weight at the front axle may be less than the front axle rating. • The snow plow manufacturer or installer can assist y[...]

  • Страница 369

    In order to calculate the amount of weight any front accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front axle, use the following formula: (W x (A + W.B.)) /W.B.= Weight the accessory is adding to the front axle. Where: W = Weight of added accessory A = Distance that the accessory is in front of the front axle W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is 4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel base is 10 ft (305 cm), then: W = 700 lb (318 kg) A = 4 ft (122 cm) W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm) (W x (A + W.B.))/W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10))/10 = 980 lbs (445 kg) So, if[...]

  • Страница 370

    You can add heavier equipment on the front of the vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear GAWR, and the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) must never be exceeded. { CAUTION: On some vehicles that have certain front mounted equipment, such as a snow plow, it may be possible to load the front axle to the front gross axle weight rating (GAWR) but not have enough weight on the rear axle to have proper braking performance. If your brakes can not work properly, you could have a crash. To help your brakes work properly when a snow plow is [...]

  • Страница 371

    Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package also have an emergency roof lamp provision package, RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is provided above the overhead console. See Auxiliary Roof-Mounted Lamp on page 3-18 for switch location. Towing Towing Your Vehicle To avoid damage, the disabled vehicle should be towed with all four wheels off the ground. Consult your dealer/retailer or a professional towing service if the disabled vehicle must be towed. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . To tow the vehicle behind another vehicle for recreational purposes, such as behind a motorhome, see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following. Recreat[...]

  • Страница 372

    Dinghy Towing Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If the vehicle is towed with all four wheels on the ground, the drivetrain components could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Do not tow the vehicle with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dinghy tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle: 1. Position the vehicle being towed behind the tow vehicle and shift the transmission to P (Park). 2. Turn the engine off and firmly set the parking brake. 4-44[...]

  • Страница 373

    3. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the tow vehicle. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 4. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting into Neutral” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40 for the proper procedure to select the Neutral position for the vehicle. 5. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle being towed is firmly attached to the towing vehicle. 6. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF and remove the key — the[...]

  • Страница 374

    Dolly Towing Front Towing (Front Wheels Of f the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Notice: If a two-wheel-drive vehicle is towed with the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Never tow the vehicle with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication while being towed. To dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle, the vehicle must be towed with the rear wheels on the dolly. See “Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Off the Ground)” later in this section for more information. 4-46[...]

  • Страница 375

    Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-wheel-drive vehicle from the front: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the front wheels onto the dolly. 3. Shift the transmission to P (Park). 4. Firmly set the parking brake. { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 5. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Dri[...]

  • Страница 376

    Rear Towing (Rear Wheels Of f the Ground) Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle from the rear: 1. Attach the dolly to the tow vehicle following the dolly manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Drive the rear wheels onto the dolly. 3. Firmly set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-45 . 4. Put the transmission in P (Park). 5. Secure the vehicle to the dolly following the manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Use an adequate clamping device designed for towing to ensure that the front wheels are locked into the straight position. 7. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles Use the following procedure to dolly tow a four-whe[...]

  • Страница 377

    { CAUTION: Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer case into N (Neutral) can cause the vehicle to roll even if the transmission is in P (Park). The driver or others could be injured. Make sure the parking brake is firmly set before the transfer case is shifted to N (Neutral). 7. Shift the transfer case to N (Neutral). See “Shifting into N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40 . 8. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF. After towing, see “Shifting Out of N (Neutral)” under Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-40 . Level Control Automatic Level Control The automatic level control rear suspension is available on light-duty vehicles and comes as a part of the Autoride ® suspension, if [...]

  • Страница 378

    Autoride ® With this feature, improved vehicle ride and handling is provided under a variety of passenger and loading conditions. The system is fully automatic and uses a computer controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock absorber to independently adjust the damping level to provide the optimum vehicle ride. Autoride also interacts with the tow/haul mode that, when activated, will provide additional control of the shock absorbers. This additional control results in better ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is loaded or towing a trailer. See “Tow/H[...]

  • Страница 379

    Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage the vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered by the vehicle warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow the advice in this section and see your dealer/retailer for important information about towing a trailer with the vehicle. To identify the trailering capacity of the vehicle, read the information in “Weight of the Trailer” that appears later in this section. Trailering is different than just driving the vehicle by itself. Trailering means changes in handling, acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy. Successful, safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to be used properly. The following information has many [...]

  • Страница 380

    Three important considerations have to do with weight: • The weight of the trailer • The weight of the trailer tongue • And the weight on the vehicle’s tires Weight of the Trailer How heavy can a trailer safely be? It depends on how the rig is used. For example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside temperature and how much the vehicle is used to pull a trailer are all important. It can depend on any special equipment on the vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry. See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this section for more information. Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required trai[...]

  • Страница 381

    Vehicle Axle Ratio Maximum Trailer Weight GCWR* 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 6.0L V8 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Short Wheel Base 5.3L V8 3.42 5,700 lbs (2 586 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 8,200 lbs (3 720 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 6.2L V8 3.42 8,100 lbs (3 674 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 1500 Series 4WD Long Wheel Base 5.3L V8 3.42 5,400 lbs (2 449 kg) 11,500 lbs (5 216 kg) 5.3L V8 K5L HD Cooling Pkg 3.42 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 6.0L V8 3.42 7,900 lbs (3 583 kg) 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg) 2500 Series 2WD Long Wheel Base 6.0L V8 3.73 9,600 lbs (4 355 kg) 16,000 lbs (7 25[...]

  • Страница 382

    Weight of the Trailer Tongue The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight to measure because it affects the total gross weight of the vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo carried in it, and the people who will be riding in the vehicle. If there are a lot of options, equipment, passengers or cargo in the vehicle, it will reduce the tongue weight the vehicle can carry, which will also reduce the trailer weight the vehicle can tow. If towing a trailer, the tongue load must be added to the GVW because the vehicle will be carrying that weight, too. See for more information about the vehicle’s maximum load capacity. The trailer t[...]

  • Страница 383

    Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight for the vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle. This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight on the rear axle. After loading the trailer, weigh the trailer and then the tongue, separately, to see if the weights are proper. If they are not, adjustments might be made by moving some items around in the trailer. Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce the traile[...]

  • Страница 384

    If the vehicle has many options and there is a front seat passenger and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and gear in the vehicle as well. 300 lbs (136 kg) could be added to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear axle weight. The vehicle now weighs: Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you might think 700 additional pounds (318 kg) should be subtracted from the trailering capacity to stay within GCWR limits. The maximum trailer would only be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and think the tongue weight should be limited to less than 1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR. But the effect on the rear axle must still be considered. Because the rear [...]

  • Страница 385

    Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight Carrying Hitches A: Body to Ground Distance B: Front of Vehicle When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle. If a step-bumper hitch will be used, the bumper could be damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and the bumper. If the loaded trailer being pulled will weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg), be sure to use a properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway control of the proper size. This equipment is very important for proper vehicle loading and good handling [...]

  • Страница 386

    Tow/Haul Mode Pressing this button at the end of the shift lever turns on and off the tow/haul mode. This indicator light on the instrument panel cluster comes on when the tow/haul mode is on. Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load. See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-38 for more information. Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating (GCWR). See “Weight of the Trailer” earlier in the section. Tow/ Haul is most useful under the following driving conditions: • When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy load through rolling ter[...]

  • Страница 387

    Trailer Brakes A loaded trailer that weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg) needs to have its own brake system that is adequate for the weight of the trailer. Be sure to read and follow the instructions for the trailer brakes so they are installed, adjusted and maintained properly. Since the vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak ® , the trailer brakes cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic system. Integrated Trailer Brake Control System The vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Control (ITBC) system for electric trailer brakes. This symbol is located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel on vehicles with an Integrated Trailer Brake Control System. The power output to the trailer brakes i[...]

  • Страница 388

    The ITBC system is powered through the vehicle’s electrical system. Turning the ignition off will also turn off the ITBC system. The ITBC system is fully functional only when the ignition is in ON or in RUN. The ITBC system can only be used with trailers with electric brakes. { CAUTION: Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the ITBC system may result in reduced or complete loss of trailer braking. There may be an increase in stopping distance or trailer instability which could result in personal injury or damage to the vehicle, trailer, or other property. An aftermarket controller may be available for use with trailers with surge, air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer brake sys[...]

  • Страница 389

    Trailer Brake Control Panel A. Manual Trailer Brake Apply Lever B. Trailer Gain Adjustment Buttons The ITBC system has a control panel located on the instrument panel to the left of the steering column. See Instrument Panel Overview on page 3-4 for more information on location. The control panel allows adjustment the amount of output, referred to as trailer gain, available to the electric trailer brakes and allows manual application the trailer brakes. The Trailer Brake Control Panel is used along with the Trailer Brake Display Page on the DIC to adjust and display power output to the trailer brakes. 4-61[...]

  • Страница 390

    Trailer Brake DIC Display Page The ITBC system displays messages into the vehicle’s Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 for more information. The display page indicates Trailer Gain setting, power output to the electric trailer brakes, trailer connection and system operational status. A. Trailer Gain Setting B. Power Output to Trailer Brakes C. No trailer with electric brakes connected or fault present The Trailer Brake Display Page can be displayed by performing any of the following actions: • Scrolling through the DIC menu pages using the odometer trip stem or the DIC Vehicle Information button (if equipped). • Pressing a Trailer Gain button ?[...]

  • Страница 391

    TRAILER GAIN – This setting is displayed anytime the Trailer Brake Display Page is active. This setting can be adjusted from 0.0 to 10.0 with either a trailer connected or disconnected. To adjust the Trailer Gain, press one of the Trailer Gain adjustment buttons located on the Trailer Brake Control Panel. Press and hold a gain button to cause the Trailer Gain to continuously adjust. To turn the output to the trailer off, adjust the Trailer Gain setting to 0.0 (zero). 0.0 (zero) gain is the factory default setting. To properly adjust trailer gain, see the Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure later in this section. TRAILER OUTPUT – This is displayed any time a trailer with electric brakes is [...]

  • Страница 392

    Trailer Gain Adjustment Procedure Trailer Gain should be set for a specific trailering condition and must be adjusted any time vehicle loading, trailer loading or road surface conditions change. Setting the Trailer Gain properly is needed for the best trailer stopping performance. A trailer that is over-gained may result in locked trailer brakes. A trailer that is under-gained may result in not enough trailer braking. Both of these conditions may result in poorer stopping and stability of the vehicle and trailer. Use the following procedure to correctly adjust Trailer Gain for each towing condition: 1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in proper working condition. 2. Connect a properly loade[...]

  • Страница 393

    Other ITBC Related DIC Messages In addition to displaying TRAILER GAIN and TRAILER OUTPUT through the DIC, trailer connection and ITBC system status is displayed in the DIC. TRAILER CONNECTED – This message will be briefly displayed when a trailer with electric brakes is first connected to the vehicle. This message will automatically turn off in about ten seconds. The driver can also acknowledge this message before it automatically turns off. CHECK TRAILER WIRING – This message will be displayed if: 1. The ITBC system first determines connection to a trailer with electric brakes and then the trailer harness becomes disconnected from the vehicle. If the disconnect occurs while the vehi[...]

  • Страница 394

    SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM – This message will be displayed when there is a problem with the ITBC system. If this message persists over multiple ignition cycles there is problem with the ITBC system. Take the vehicle to an authorized dealer/retailer to have the ITBC system diagnosed and repaired. If either the CHECK TRAILER WIRING or SERVICE TRAILER BRAKE SYSTEM message is displayed while driving the vehicle, power is no longer available to the trailer brakes. When traff ic conditions allow, carefully pull the vehicle over to the side of the road and turn the ignition off. Check the wiring connection to the trailer and turn the ignition back on. If either of these messages continues, eit[...]

  • Страница 395

    Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience. Get to know the rig before setting out for the open road. Get acquainted with the feel of handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer. And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are driving is now longer and not as responsive as the vehicle is by itself. Before starting, check all trailer hitch parts and attachments, safety chains, electrical connectors, lamps, tires and mirror adjustments. If the trailer has electric brakes, start the vehicle and trailer moving and then apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure the brakes are working. This checks the electrical connection at the same time. During the trip,[...]

  • Страница 396

    Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer The arrows on the instrument panel flash whenever signaling a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailer lamps also flash, telling other drivers the vehicle is turning, changing lanes or stopping. When towing a trailer, the arrows on the instrument panel flash for turns even if the bulbs on the trailer are burned out. For this reason you may think other drivers are seeing the signal when they are not. It is important to check occasionally to be sure the trailer bulbs are still working. Driving On Grades Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before starting down a long or steep downgrade. If the transmission is not shifted down, the brakes migh[...]

  • Страница 397

    Parking on Hills { CAUTION: Parking the vehicle on a hill with the trailer attached can be dangerous. If something goes wrong, the rig could start to move. People can be injured, and both the vehicle and the trailer can be damaged. When possible, always park the rig on a flat surface. If parking the rig on a hill: 1. Press the brake pedal, but do not shift into P (Park) yet. Turn the wheels into the curb if facing downhill or into traff ic if facing uphill. 2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer wheels. 3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load. 4. Reapply the brake pedal. Then apply the parking brake and shift into P (Park). [...]

  • Страница 398

    Leaving After Parking on a Hill 1. Apply and hold the brake pedal while you: • Start the engine • Shift into a gear • Release the parking brake 2. Let up on the brake pedal. 3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks. 4. Stop and have someone pick up and store the chocks. Maintenance When Trailer Towing The vehicle needs service more often when pulling a trailer. See this manual’s Maintenance Schedule or Index for more information. Things that are especially important in trailer operation are automatic transmission fluid, engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake system. It is a good idea to inspect these before and during the trip. Check periodically[...]

  • Страница 399

    Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness Package The vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket on the hitch platform. The seven-wire harness contains the following trailer circuits: • Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal • Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal • Brown: Taillamps • White: Ground • Light Green: Back-up Lamps • Red: Battery Feed* • Dark Blue: Trailer Brake* *The fuses for these two circuits are installed in the underhood electrical center, but the wires are not connected. They should be connected by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. If charging a remote (non-[...]

  • Страница 400

    Electric Brake Control Wiring Provisions These wiring provisions are included with the vehicle as part of the trailer wiring package. These provisions are for an electric brake controller. The instrument panel contains blunt cut wires near the data link connector for the trailer brake controller. The harness contains the following wires: • Dark Blue: Brake Signal to Trailer Connector • Red/Black: Battery • Light Blue/White: Brake Switch • White: Ground It should be installed by your dealer/retailer or a qualified service center. If the vehicle is equipped with an ITBC, the blunt cuts exist, but are not connected further in the harness. If an aftermarket trailer brake controller is i[...]

  • Страница 401

    Service ........................................................... .5-3 Accessories and Modifications ......................... .5-3 California Proposition 65 Warning .................... .5-4 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements .... .5-4 Doing Your Own Service Work ........................ .5-4 Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle ................................................ .5-5 Fuel ............................................................... .5-5 Gasoline Octane ........................................... .5-5 Gasoline Specifications ................................... .5-6 California Fuel .............................................. .5-6 Additives .......[...]

  • Страница 402

    Tire Pressure Monitor Operation .................... .5-73 Tire Inspection and Rotation .......................... .5-76 When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... .5-77 Buying New Tires ........................................ .5-78 Different Size Tires and Wheels ..................... .5-80 Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... .5-81 Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. .5-82 Wheel Replacement ..................................... .5-82 Tire Chains ................................................. .5-84 If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... .5-85 Changing a Flat Tire .................................... .5-86 Removing the Spare[...]

  • Страница 403

    Service For service and parts needs, visit your dealer/retailer. You will receive genuine GM parts and GM-trained and supported service people. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks: Accessories and Modifications When non-dealer/non-retailer accessories are added to the vehicle, they can affect vehicle performance and safety, including such things as airbags, braking, stability, ride and handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction control, and stability control. Some of these accessories could even cause malfunction or damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Damage to vehicle components resulting from the installation o[...]

  • Страница 404

    California Proposition 65 Warning Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems (including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and some component wear by-products contain and/or emit these chemicals. California Perchlorate Materials Requirements Certain types of automotive applications, such as airbag initiators, seat belt pretensioners, and lithium batteries contained in remote keyless transmitters, may contain perchlorate materials. Special handling may be necessary. For additional information, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/[...]

  • Страница 405

    This vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to do your own service work, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-96 . Keep a record with all parts receipts and list the mileage and the date of any service work performed. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17 . Adding Equipment to the Outside of the Vehicle Things added to the outside of the vehicle can affect the airflow around it. This can cause wind noise and can affect fuel economy and windshield washer performance. Check with your dealer/retailer before adding equipment to the outside of the vehicle. Fuel Use of the recommended fuel is an important part of the proper maintenance of this vehicle. To help keep the engi[...]

  • Страница 406

    If this occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Otherwise, you could damage the engine. If you are using gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking, the engine needs service. Gasoline Specifications At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM specification D 4814 in the United States or CAN/CGSB-3.5 or 3.511 in Canada. Some gasolines contain an octane-enhancing additive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). We recommend against the use of gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on page 5-6 for additional information. California Fuel If the vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions Standards, it is designed to[...]

  • Страница 407

    Also, your dealer/retailer has additives that will help correct and prevent most deposit-related problems. Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and ethanol, and reformulated gasolines might be available in your area. We recommend that you use these gasolines, if they comply with the specifications described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol must not be used in vehicles that were not designed for those fuels. Notice: This vehicle was not designed for fuel that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing methanol. It can corrode metal parts in the fuel system and also damage plastic and rubber parts. That damage would not be cove[...]

  • Страница 408

    At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM Specification D 5798. By definition, this means that fuel labeled E85 will have an ethanol content between 70% and 85%. Filling the fuel tank with fuel mixtures that do not meet ASTM specifications can affect driveability and could cause the malfunction indicator lamp to come on. To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel must be formulated properly for your climate according to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble starting on E85, it could be because the E85 fuel is not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens, switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to the fuel tank can improve starting. For good starting and heater[...]

  • Страница 409

    Filling the Tank { CAUTION: Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries to you and others, read and follow all the instructions on the pump island. Turn off the engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling the vehicle. Do not use cellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling the vehicle. This is against the law in some places. Do not re-enter the vehicle while pumping fuel. Keep children away from the fuel pump; never let children pump fuel. The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel door on the driver side of the vehic[...]

  • Страница 410

    To open the fuel door, push the rearward center edge in and release and it will open. To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise. The fuel cap has a spring in it; if the cap is released too soon, it will spring back to the right. While refueling, hang the tethered fuel cap from the hook on the fuel door. { CAUTION: Fuel can spray out on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly. If you spill fuel and then something ignites it, you could be badly burned. This spray can happen if the tank is nearly full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way. Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or o[...]

  • Страница 411

    If the vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC), the TIGHTEN GAS CAP message displays if the fuel cap is not properly installed. { CAUTION: If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel by shutting off the pump or by notifying the station attendant. Leave the area immediately. Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get the right type. Your dealer/retailer can get one for you. If you get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may cause the malfunction indicator lamp to light and may damage the fuel tank and emissions system. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-43 . Filling a Portable Fuel Container { CAUTION: Never ?[...]

  • Страница 412

    Checking Things Under the Hood { CAUTION: An electric fan under the hood can start up and injure you even when the engine is not running. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Things that burn can get on hot engine parts and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or others could be burned. Be careful not to drop or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine. 5-12[...]

  • Страница 413

    Hood Release To open the hood: 1. Pull the handle with this symbol on it. It is located inside the vehicle to the lower left of the steering wheel. 2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and locate the secondary hood release, near the center of the grille. 3. Push the secondary hood release to the right. 4. Lift the hood. Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps are on properly. Then bring the hood from full open to within 6 inches (152 mm) from the closed position, pause, then push the front center of the hood with a swift, firm motion to fully close the hood. 5-13[...]

  • Страница 414

    Engine Compartment Overview If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. When you open the hood on the 5.3L engine (4.8L, 6.0L and 6.2L similar), here is what you will see: 5-14[...]

  • Страница 415

    A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 . B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap. See Cooling System on page 5-28 . C. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting on page 5-44 . D. Battery on page 5-43 . E. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15 . F. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) on page 5-22 or Automatic Transmission Fluid (4-Speed Transmission) on page 5-25 . G. Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal (Out of View). See Jump Starting on page 5-44 . H. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out of View). See “Checking Engine Oil” under Engine Oil on page 5-15 . I. En[...]

  • Страница 416

    When to Add Engine Oil If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the dipstick, add at least one quart/liter of the recommended oil. This section explains what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity, see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 . Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine has so much oil that the oil level gets above the cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating range, the engine could be damaged. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the engine oil fill cap. Add enough oil to put the level somewhere in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all the way back in when through. 5-16[...]

  • Страница 417

    What Kind of Engine Oil to Use Look for three things: • GM6094M Use only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M. • SAE 5W-30 SAE 5W-30 is best for the vehicle. These numbers on an oil container show its viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50. • American Petroleum Institute (API) starburst symbol Oils meeting these requirements should have the starburst symbol on the container. This symbol indicates that the oil has been certified by the American Petroleum Institute (API). Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failure to use[...]

  • Страница 418

    Engine Oil Additives / Engine Oil Flushes Do not add anything to the oil. The recommended oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard GM6094M are all that is needed for good performance and engine protection. Engine oil system flushes are not recommended and could cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. Engine Oil Life System When to Change Engine Oil This vehicle has a computer system that indicates when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage at which an oil change is indicated can vary considerably. For the oil life system to work properly, the [...]

  • Страница 419

    How to Reset the Engine Oil Life System The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change the engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Whenever the oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs where the oil is changed prior to a CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message coming on, reset the system. Always reset the engine oil life to 100% after every oil change. It will not reset itself. To reset the Engine Oil Life System: 1. Display the OIL LIFE REMAINING on the DIC. If the vehicle does not have DIC buttons, the vehicle must be in P (Park) to access this display. See DIC Operation and Displays (With DIC Buttons) on page 3-52 o[...]

  • Страница 420

    Engine Air Cleaner/Filter See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the engine air cleaner/filter. Inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II intervals and replace it at the first oil change after each 50,000 mile (80 000 km) interval. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information. If driving on dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the filter at each engine oil change. How to Inspect the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the vehicle by following Steps 1 through 6. When the engine air cleaner/filter is removed, lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the engine air [...]

  • Страница 421

    3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as little dirt as possible. 4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces and the housing. 5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter. 6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws. { CAUTION: Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is not there and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be careful working on the engine with the air cleaner/filter off. 5-21[...]

  • Страница 422

    Automatic Transmission Fluid (6-Speed Transmission) When to Check and Change Automatic Transmission Fluid It is usually not necessary to check the transmission fluid level. The only reason for fluid loss is a transmission leak or overheating the transmission. If you suspect a small leak, then use the following checking procedures to check the fluid level. However, if there is a large leak, then it may be necessary to have the vehicle towed to a dealer/ retailer service department and have it repaired before driving the vehicle further. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always u[...]

  • Страница 423

    5. Keep the engine running and press the Trip/Fuel button or trip odometer reset stem until TRANS TEMP (Transmission Temperature) displays on the Driver Information Center (DIC). 6. Using the TRANS TEMP reading, determine and perform the appropriate check procedure. If the TRANS TEMP reading is not within the required temperature ranges, allow the vehicle to cool, or operate the vehicle until the appropriate transmission fluid temperature is reached. Cold Check Procedure Use this procedure only as a reference to determine if the transmission has enough fluid to be operated safely until a hot check procedure can be made. The hot check procedure is the most accurate method to check the flui[...]

  • Страница 424

    5. If the fluid level is below the COLD check band, add only enough fluid as necessary to bring the level into the COLD band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. 6. Perform a hot check at the first opportunity after the transmission reaches a normal operating temperature between 160°F to 200°F (71°C to 93°C). 7. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Hot Check Procedure Use this procedure to check the transmission fluid level when the transmission fluid temperature is between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C). The hot check is t[...]

  • Страница 425

    5. Safe operating level is within the HOT cross hatch band on the dipstick. If the fluid level is not within the HOT band, and the transmission temperature is between 160°F and 200°F (71°C and 93°C), add or drain fluid as necessary to bring the level into the HOT band. If the fluid level is low, add only enough fluid to bring the level into the HOT band. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5L). Do not overfill. 6. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the dipstick back in all the way, then flip the handle down to lock the dipstick in place. Consistency of Readings Always check the fluid level at least twice using the procedure described pre[...]

  • Страница 426

    How to Check Automatic Transmission Fluid Because this operation can be a little diff icult, you may choose to have this done at the dealer/retailer service department. If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions here or you could get a false reading on the dipstick. Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage your transmission. Too much can mean that some of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine parts or exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Too little fluid could cause the transmission to overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if you check your transmission fluid. Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the transmission fluid level if you have [...]

  • Страница 427

    Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps: 1. Locate the transmission dipstick handle with this graphic which is located at the rear of the engine compartment, on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location. 2. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel. 3. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds and then pull it back out again. 4. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area, below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check. Be sure to keep the[...]

  • Страница 428

    How to Add Automatic Transmission Fluid Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Using a funnel, add fluid down the transmission dipstick tube only after checking the transmission fluid while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference. If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill. Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission fluid may damage the vehicle, and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. [...]

  • Страница 429

    { CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them. If you do, you can be burned. Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That could cause an engine fire, and you could be burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive the vehicle. Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL ® can cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant could require changing sooner, a[...]

  • Страница 430

    What to Use { CAUTION: Adding only plain water to the cooling system can be dangerous. Plain water, or some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil before the proper coolant mixture will. The vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the wrong mixture, the engine could get too hot but you would not get the overheat warning. The engine could catch fire and you or others could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant. If using this mixture, nothing else needs to be added. This mixture: • Gives freezing protection down to − 34°F [...]

  • Страница 431

    Checking Coolant The vehicle must be on a level surface when checking the coolant level. Check to see if coolant is visible in the coolant surge tank. If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling, do not do anything else until it cools down. If coolant is visible but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and DEX-COOL ® coolant at the coolant surge tank, but be sure the cooling system is cool before this is done. The coolant surge tank is located in the engine compartment on the passenger side of the vehicle. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for more information on location. The coolant level should be at[...]

  • Страница 432

    How to Add Coolant to the Surge Tank { CAUTION: You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol and it will burn if the engine parts are hot enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine. Notice: This vehicle has a specific coolant fill procedure. Failure to follow this procedure could cause the engine to overheat and be severely damaged. { CAUTION: An electric engine cooling fan under the hood can start up even when the engine is not running and can cause injury. Keep hands, clothing, and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling system can blow out and burn you badly. They are under pre[...]

  • Страница 433

    If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant as follows: 1. You can remove the coolant surge tank pressure cap when the cooling system, including the coolant surge tank pressure cap and upper radiator hose, is no longer hot. Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left. 2. Keep turning the pressure cap slowly and remove it. 3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture to the FULL COLD mark. 5-33[...]

  • Страница 434

    4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the engine cooling fan. By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark. 5. Replace the pressure cap. Be sure the pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated. 6. Verify coolant level after engine is shut off and the coolant is cold. If necessary, repeat coolant fill procedure Steps 1 through 6. Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed, coolant loss and possible engine damage may occ[...]

  • Страница 435

    Engine Overheating The vehicle has several indicators to warn of engine overheating. There is a coolant temperature gage on your vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on page 3-42 . In addition, ENGINE OVERHEATED STOP ENGINE, ENGINE OVERHEATED IDLE ENGINE, and a ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED message comes on in the Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument panel. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-64 . You may decide not to lift the hood when this warning appears, but instead get service help right away. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-7 . If you do decide to lift the hood, make sure the vehicle is parked on a level surface. Then check to see if t[...]

  • Страница 436

    If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment { CAUTION: Steam from an overheated engine can burn you badly, even if you just open the hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it. Turn it off and get everyone away from the vehicle until it cools down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or coolant before you open the hood. If you keep driving when the vehicles engine is overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire. You or others could be badly burned. Stop the engine if it overheats, and get out of the vehicle until the engine is cool. See Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on page 5-37 for information on driving to a safe place in an emergency. If No [...]

  • Страница 437

    If the temperature overheat gage is no longer in the overheat zone or an overheat warning no longer displays, the vehicle can be driven. Continue to drive the vehicle slow for about 10 minutes. Keep a safe vehicle distance from the car in front of you. If the warning does not come back on, continue to drive normally. If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park the vehicle right away. If there is no sign of steam, idle the engine for three minutes while parked. If the warning is still displayed, turn off the engine until it cools down. Also, see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode” later in this section. Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode If an overheated engine [...]

  • Страница 438

    If the vehicle has electric cooling fans, you may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operating the air conditioning system, the fans may change to high speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise. This is normal and indicates that the cooling system is functioning properly. The fans will change to low speed when additional cooling is no longer required. Power Steering Fluid If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for reservo[...]

  • Страница 439

    What to Use To determine what kind of fluid to use, see Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Always use the proper fluid. Notice: Use of the incorrect fluid may damage the vehicle and the damages may not be covered by the vehicle’s warranty. Always use the correct fluid listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Windshield Washer Fluid What to Use When windshield washer fluid needs to be added, be sure to read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. Use a fluid that has suff icient protection against freezing in an area where the temperature may fall below freezing. Adding Washer Fluid The vehicle has a low washer fluid message in the DIC that comes[...]

  • Страница 440

    Brakes Brake Fluid The brake master cylinder reservoir is filled with DOT 3 brake fluid. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for the location of the reservoir. There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level in the reservoir might go down: • The brake fluid level goes down because of normal brake lining wear. When new linings are installed, the fluid level goes back up. • A fluid leak in the brake hydraulic system can also cause a low fluid level. Have the brake hydraulic system fixed, since a leak means that sooner or later the brakes will not work well. Do not top off the brake fluid. Adding fluid does not correct a leak. If fluid is added when the linings are [...]

  • Страница 441

    Checking Brake Fluid Check brake fluid by looking at the brake fluid reservoir. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 . The fluid level should be above MIN. If it is not, have the brake hydraulic system checked to see if there is a leak. After work is done on the brake hydraulic system, make sure the level is above the MIN but not over the MAX mark. What to Add Use only new DOT 3 brake fluid from a sealed container. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the area around the cap before removing it. This helps keep dirt from entering the reservoir. { CAUTION: With the wrong kind of fluid in the brake hydraulic system, th[...]

  • Страница 442

    Brake Wear This vehicle has disc brakes. Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound can come and go or be heard all the time the vehicle is moving, except when applying the brake pedal firmly. { CAUTION: The brake wear warning sound means that soon the brakes will not work well. That could lead to an accident. When the brake wear warning sound is heard, have the vehicle serviced. Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake pads could result in costly brake repair. Some driving conditions or climates can cause a brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or lightly applied. This[...]

  • Страница 443

    Battery If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. This vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When it is time for a new battery, see your dealer/retailer for one that has the replacement number shown on the original battery’s label. See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-14 for battery location. Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling. Vehicle Storage { CAUTION: Batteries have acid that can burn you and gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt if you are not careful. See Jump St[...]

  • Страница 444

    Jump Starting If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If the vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down, you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the following steps to do it safely. { CAUTION: Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous because: • They contain acid that can burn you. • They contain gas that can explode or ignite. • They contain enough electricity to burn you. If you do not follow these steps exactly, some or all of these things can hurt you. Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly damage to the vehicle that would not be covered by the warranty. [...]

  • Страница 445

    Notice: If you leave the radio or other accessories on during the jump starting procedure, they could be damaged. The repairs would not be covered by the warranty. Always turn off the radio and other accessories when jump starting the vehicle. 3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off the radio and all the lamps that are not needed. This avoids sparks and helps save both batteries. And it could save the radio! 4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the positive (+) and negative ( − ) terminal locations on that vehicle. Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting te[...]

  • Страница 446

    { CAUTION: An electric fan can start up even when the engine is not running and can injure you. Keep hands, clothing and tools away from any underhood electric fan. { CAUTION: Using a match near a battery can cause battery gas to explode. People have been hurt doing this, and some have been blinded. Use a flashlight if you need more light. Be sure the battery has enough water. You do not need to add water to the battery installed in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there. If it is low, add water to take care of that first. If you do not, explosive gas could be present. CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) Battery fluid contain[...]

  • Страница 447

    Do not connect positive (+) to negative ( − )o ry o u will get a short that would damage the battery and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal on the dead battery because this can cause sparks. 6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to the positive (+) terminal of the vehicle with the dead battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one. 8. Now connect the black negative ( − ) cable to the negative ( − ) terminal of the good battery. Use a remote [...]

  • Страница 448

    10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and run the engine for a while. 11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery. If it will not start after a few tries, it probably needs service. Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Always connect and remove the jumper cables in the correct order, making sure that the cables do not touch each other or other metal. A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote Negative ( − ) Terminal B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote Negative ( − ) Terminals C. Dead Battery or Remote [...]

  • Страница 449

    To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles do the following: 1. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle that had the bad battery. 2. Disconnect the black negative ( − ) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the vehicle with the good battery. 4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the other vehicle. 5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover, if the vehicle has one, to its original position. Rear Axle When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspe[...]

  • Страница 450

    How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. • For all 4.8L, 5.3L 1500 series and all 6.2L all wheel drive 1500 series luxury model applications, the proper level is from 0.04 inch to 0.75 inch (1.0 mm to 19.0 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. 1500 Series 2500 Series 5-50[...]

  • Страница 451

    • For all 6.0L 1500 series and all 6.2L non-all wheel drive 1500 series luxury model applications, the proper level is from 0.6 inch to 1.6 inches (15 mm to 40 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located on the rear axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. • The proper fill level for the 2500 series is from 0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of the filler plug hole, located at the front of the axle. Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level. Four-Wheel Drive Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these vehicles. There are two additional systems that need lubrication. Transfer Case When to Check Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly[...]

  • Страница 452

    When to Change Lubricant Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 . What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Front Axle When to Check and Change Lubricant It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem. Have it inspected and repaired. How to Check Lubricant To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on a level surface. A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug 1500 Series 5-52[...]

  • Страница 453

    A: Fill Plug B: Drain Plug • When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant to raise the level from 0 (0 mm) to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) below the filler plug hole. • When the differential is at operating temperature (warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole. What to Use Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . Headlamp Aiming The vehicle has a visual optical headlamp aiming system. The aim of the headlamps have been preset at the factory and should need no further adjustment. However, if the vehicle is damaged in a crash, the aim of the headlamps can be a[...]

  • Страница 454

    The vehicle should: • Be placed so the headlamps are 25 ft. (7.6 m) from a light colored wall. • Have all four tires on a level surface which is level all the way to the wall. • Be placed so it is perpendicular to the wall. • Not have any snow, ice, or mud on it. • Be fully assembled and all other work stopped while headlamp aiming is being performed. • Be normally loaded with a full tank of fuel and one person or 160 lbs (75 kg) sitting on the driver seat. • Have tires properly inflated. • Have the spare tire is in its proper location in the vehicle. Headlamp aiming is done with the vehicle’s low-beam headlamps. The high-beam headlamps will be correctly aimed if the low-b[...]

  • Страница 455

    4. At a wall measure from the ground upward (A) to the recorded distance from Step 3 and mark it. 5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B) on the wall or flat surface the width of the vehicle at the height of the mark in Step 4. Notice: Do not cover a headlamp to improve beam cut-off when aiming. Covering a headlamp may cause excessive heat build-up which may cause damage to the headlamp. 6. Turn on the low-beam headlamps and place a piece of cardboard or equivalent in front of the headlamp not being adjusted. This allows only the beam of light from the headlamp being adjusted to be seen on the flat surface. 7. Locate the vertical headlamp aiming screws, which are under the hood near each hea[...]

  • Страница 456

    9. Make sure that the light from the headlamp is positioned at the bottom edge of the horizontal tape line. The lamp on the left (A) shows the correct headlamp aim. The lamp on the right (B) shows the incorrect headlamp aim. 10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 for the opposite headlamp. Bulb Replacement For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see Replacement Bulbs on page 5-58 . For any bulb changing procedure not listed in this section, contact your dealer/retailer. Halogen Bulbs { CAUTION: Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb. You or others could be injured. Be sure to read and follow the instructions on the bulb package. 5-56[...]

  • Страница 457

    Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. A. Taillamp/Stoplamp B. Back-up Lamp C. Turn Signal Lamp/Taillamp To replace one of these bulbs: 1. Open the liftgate. See Power Liftgate on page 2-15 for more information. 2. Remove the two screws from the taillamp assembly. 3. Pull the taillamp assembly rearward until the inner pins on the taillamp assembly are disengaged from the vehicle. 4. Press the release tab, if bulb socket has one, and turn the bulb socket counterclockwise to remove it from the taillamp assembly. 5. Pull the old bulb straight out from the bulb socket. 5-57[...]

  • Страница 458

    6. Press a new bulb into the bulb socket and insert it into the taillamp assembly. Turn the bulb socket clockwise into the taillamp assembly until it clicks. 7. Reinstall the taillamp assembly. When reinstalling, make sure to line up the pins on the taillamp assembly with the vehicle. If this is not done the taillamp assembly cannot be correctly installed. License Plate Lamp 1. Remove the two screws holding each of the license plate lamps to the molding that is part of the liftgate. 2. Twist and pull the license plate lamp forward through the molding opening. 3. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise and pull the bulb straight out of the socket. 4. Install the new bulb. 5. Reverse Steps 1 thr[...]

  • Страница 459

    Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear or cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 . Replacement blades come in different types and are removed in different ways. To replace the wiper blade assembly: 1. Pull the windshield wiper arm connector away from the windshield. 2. Squeeze the grooved areas on each side of the blade, and turn the blade assembly away from the arm connector. 3. Install the new blade onto the arm connector and make sure the grooved areas are fully set in the locked position. For the proper type and size, see Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 . 5-59[...]

  • Страница 460

    Backglass Wiper Blade Replacement 1. Lift the wiper blade assembly up and out of the park rest position. 2. Pull the wiper blade assembly away from the backglass. The backglass wiper blade will not lock in a vertical position, so care should be used when pulling it away from the vehicle. 3. Turn the wiper blade assembly, and pull it off of the wiper arm. Hold the wiper arm in position and push the blade away from the wiper arm. 4. Replace the wiper blade. 5. Return the wiper blade assembly to the park rest position. 5-60[...]

  • Страница 461

    Tires Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions about your tire warranty and where to obtain service, see your vehicle Warranty booklet for details. For additional information refer to the tire manufacturer. { CAUTION: Poorly maintained and improperly used tires are dangerous. • Overloading your vehicle’s tires can cause overheating as a result of too much flexing. You could have an air-out and a serious accident. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 . CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) • Underinflated tires pose the same danger as overloaded tires. The resulting accident could cause serious injury. Check all[...]

  • Страница 462

    20-Inch Tires If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch P275/55R20 size tires, they are classified as touring tires and are designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide tread design is not recommended for off-road driving. See Of f-Road Driving on page 4-13 , for additional information. Tire Sidewall Labeling Useful information about a tire is molded into the sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall. (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later i[...]

  • Страница 463

    (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) DOT (Department of Transportation) : The Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. (D) Tire Identification Number (TIN) : The letters and numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured. The TIN is [...]

  • Страница 464

    (A) Tire Size : The tire size code is a combination of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction type, and service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this section for more detail. (B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria Specification) : Original equipment tires designed to GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC specifications meet or exceed all federal safety guidelines. (C) Dual Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used in a dual configuration. For information on [...]

  • Страница 465

    (F) Tire Ply Material : The type of cord and number of plies in the sidewall and under the tread. (G) Single Tire Maximum Load : Maximum load that can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to support that load when used as a single. For information on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 . Tire Size The following examples show the different parts of a tire size. (A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as the first character in the tire size means a passenger vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width : Th[...]

  • Страница 466

    (A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : The United States version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as the first two characters in the tire size means a light truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire and Rim Association. (B) Tire Width : The three-digit number indicates the tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall. (C) Aspect Ratio : A two-digit number that indicates the tire height-to-width measurements. For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75 percent as high as it is wide. (D) Construction Code : A letter code is used to in[...]

  • Страница 467

    Tire Terminology and Definitions Air Pressure : The amount of air inside the tire pressing outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa). Accessory Weight : This means the combined weight of optional accessories. Some examples of optional accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power windows, power seats, and air conditioning. Aspect Ratio : The relationship of a tire’s height to its width. Belt : A rubber coated layer of cords that is located between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made from steel or other reinforcing materials. Bead : The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped b[...]

  • Страница 468

    GAWR RR : Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 . Intended Outboard Sidewall : The side of an asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle. Kilopascal (kPa) : The metric unit for air pressure. Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire : A tire used on light duty trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles. Load Index : An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279 that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire. Maximum Inflation Pressure : The maximum air pressure to which a cold tire can be inflated. The maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall. Maximum Load Rating : The load rating for a tire at the maximum perm[...]

  • Страница 469

    Radial Ply Tire : A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread. Rim : A metal support for a tire and upon which the tire beads are seated. Sidewall : The portion of a tire between the tread and the bead. Speed Rating : An alphanumeric code assigned to a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can operate. Traction : The friction between the tire and the road surface. The amount of grip provided. Tread : The portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road. Treadwear Indicators : Narrow bands, sometimes called wear bars, that show across the tread of a tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.[...]

  • Страница 470

    Inflation - Tire Pressure If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate effectively. Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not. If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation), you can get the following: • Too much flexing • Too much heat • Tire overloading • Premature or irregular wear • Poor handling • Reduced fuel economy If your tires have too much air (over-inflation), you can get the following: • Unusual wear • Poor handling • Rough ride • Needless damage from road hazards A vehicle specific Tire [...]

  • Страница 471

    How to Check Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may look properly inflated even when they are underinflated. Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting for at least three hours or driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading Information label, no further adjustment is necessary. If the pressure is low, add air[...]

  • Страница 472

    Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists[...]

  • Страница 473

    Tire Pressure Monitor Operation If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. This vehicle may have a Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS). The TPMS is designed to warn the driver when a low tire pressure condition exists. TPMS sensors are mounted onto each tire and wheel assembly, excluding the spare tire and wheel assembly. The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in the vehicle’s tires and transmit the tire pressure readings to a receiver located in the vehicle. When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS illuminates the low tire pressure warning light located on the instrument panel cluster. At the same time a message to check t[...]

  • Страница 474

    TPMS Malfunction Light and Message The TPMS will not function properly if one or more of the TPMS sensors are missing or inoperable. When the system detects a malfunction, the low tire warning light flashes for about one minute and then stays on for the remainder of the ignition cycle. A DIC warning message is also displayed. The low tire warning light and DIC warning message come on at each ignition cycle until the problem is corrected. Some of the conditions that can cause the malfunction light and DIC message to come on are: • One of the road tires has been replaced with the spare tire. The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. The TPMS malfunction light and DIC message should go off[...]

  • Страница 475

    TPMS Sensor Matching Process Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code. Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. The sensors are matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order: driver side front tire, passenger side front tire, passenger side rear tire, and driver side rear tire using a TPMS diagnostic tool. See your dealer/retailer for service. The TPMS sensors can also be matched to each tire/ wheel position by increasing or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. If increasing the tire’s air pressure, do not exceed the maximum inflation pres[...]

  • Страница 476

    8. Proceed to the driver side rear tire, and repeat the procedure in Step 5. The horn sounds two times to indicate the sensor identification code has been matched to the driver side rear tire, and the TPMS sensor matching process is no longer active. The TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE message on the DIC display screen goes off. 9. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK/OFF. 10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure level as indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. 11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems. Tire Inspection and Rotation We recommend that you regularly inspect your vehicle’s tires, including the spare tire, for signs of wear or damage. See When It Is Time for N[...]

  • Страница 477

    Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 . { CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When you change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 . Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push, pull, and then try to rotate or turn the[...]

  • Страница 478

    You need new tires if any of the following statements are true: • You can see the indicators at three or more places around the tire. • You can see cord or fabric showing through the tire’s rubber. • The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, or snagged deep enough to show cord or fabric. • The tire has a bump, bulge, or split. • The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage that cannot be repaired well because of the size or location of the damage. The rubber in tires degrades over time, even if they are not being used. This is also true for the spare tire, if your vehicle has one. Multiple conditions affect how fast this aging takes place, including temperatures, loading conditions[...]

  • Страница 479

    { CAUTION: Mixing tires could cause you to lose control while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes, brands, or types (radial and bias-belted tires), the vehicle might not handle properly, and you could have a crash. Using tires of different sizes, brands, or types could also cause damage to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size, brand, and type tires on all wheels. Your vehicle may have a different size spare than the road tires (those originally installed on your vehicle). When new, your vehicle included a spare tire and wheel assembly with a similar overall diameter as your vehicle’s road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive on it. Because this spare was developed f[...]

  • Страница 480

    Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on the Tire and Loading Information Label. See Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 , for more information about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its location on your vehicle. Dif ferent Size Tires and Wheels If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than your original equipment wheels and tires, this could affect the way your vehicle performs, including its braking, ride and handling characteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic systems such as anti-lock brakes, rollover airbags, traction control, and electronic stability control, the performance of these systems can [...]

  • Страница 481

    Uniform Tire Quality Grading Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A The following information relates to the system developed by the United States National Highway Traff ic Safety Administration (NHTSA), which grades tires by treadwear, traction, and temperature performance. This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States. The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG) system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires, space-saver, or temporary use spare tires, tires with nominal rim di[...]

  • Страница 482

    Temperature – A, B, C The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law. It should be noted[...]

  • Страница 483

    Your dealer/retailer will know the kind of wheel you need. Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offset, and be mounted the same way as the one it replaces. If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) sensors, replace them only with new GM original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure to have the right wheel, wheel bolts, wheel nuts, and TPMS sensors for your vehicle. { CAUTION: Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be dangerous. It could affect the braking and handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose air and make you lose control. Yo[...]

  • Страница 484

    Tire Chains If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. { CAUTION: If your vehicle has P265/65R18 or P275/55R20 size tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage your vehicle because there is not enough clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle without the proper amount of clearance can cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the tire chains could cause you to lose control of your vehicle and you or others may be injured in a crash. Use another type of traction device only if its manufacturer recommends it for use on your vehicle and tire size combination and road conditions. Follow that manufacturer?[...]

  • Страница 485

    If a Tire Goes Flat It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here are a few tips about what to expect and what to do: If a front tire fails, the flat tire creates a drag that pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake to a stop well out of the traff ic lane. A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a skid and may require the same correction you would use in a skid. In [...]

  • Страница 486

    Changing a Flat Tire If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on the hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers on page 3-6 . { CAUTION: Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you or other people. You and they could be badly injured or even killed. Find a level place to change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle from moving: 1. Set the parking brake firmly. 2. Put the shift lever in P (Park). CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) 3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, b[...]

  • Страница 487

    A. Wheel Block B. Flat Tire The following information explains how to use the jack and change a tire. Removing the Spare Tire and Tools The equipment you will need to change a flat tire is stored under the storage tray, which is located on the driver side trim panel (over the rear wheelhouse). 1. Remove the tray to access the tools by pulling up on the finger depression under the jack symbol. Regular Wheelbase shown, Extended Wheelbase similar 5-87[...]

  • Страница 488

    2. Remove the wing nut (B) used to retain the tool bag by turning it counterclockwise. 3. Turn the knob (A) on the jack counterclockwise to release the jack and wheel blocks from the bracket. 4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block retainer by turning the wing nut (C) counterclockwise. The tools you will be using include the following: A. Jack B. Wheel Blocks C. Jack Handle D. Jack Handle Extensions E. Wheel Wrench 5-88[...]

  • Страница 489

    To access the spare tire, refer to the following graphics and instructions: A. Hoist Assembly B. Hoist Shaft C. Hoist Shaft Access Cover/Hole D. Jack Handle Extensions E. Wheel Wrench F. Hoist Cable G. Tire/Wheel Retainer H. Spare Tire (Valve Stem Pointed Down) I. Hoist Shaft Access Hole J. Hoist End of Extension Tool K. Spare Tire Lock 1. Open the hoist shaft access door (C) on the bumper to access the spare tire lock (K). 2. To remove the spare tire lock, insert the ignition key, turn it clockwise and then pull it straight out. 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and wheel wrench (E) as shown. 5-89[...]

  • Страница 490

    4. Insert the open end of the extension (J) through the hole in the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft access hole). Be sure the hoist end (J) of the extension (D) connects to the hoist shaft (B). The ribbed square end of the extension is used to lower the spare tire. 5. Turn the wheel wrench (E) counterclockwise to lower the spare tire (H) to the ground. Continue to turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be pulled out from under the vehicle. If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-99 for more information. 6. Use the wheel wrench hook that allows you to pull the hoist cable towards yo[...]

  • Страница 491

    7. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle with some slack in the cable to access the tire/wheel retainer. Separate the retainer from the guide pin by sliding the retainer up the pin while pressing down on the latch. Once the retainer is separated from the guide pin, tilt the retainer and pull it through the center of the wheel along with the cable and latch. 8. Put the spare tire near the flat tire. 5-91[...]

  • Страница 492

    Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire 1. Do a safety check before proceeding. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 for more information. 2. If your vehicle has a center cap that covers the wheel fasteners, place the chisel end of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and gently pry the cap out. If the wheel has a bolt-on hub cap, loosen the plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. The plastic nut caps will be retained in the hub cap after it is removed from the wheel. 3. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet. 5-92[...]

  • Страница 493

    A. Front Position B. Rear Position 4. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown. Jacking Locations (Overall View) Front Position — 1500 Models 5-93[...]

  • Страница 494

    Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle and only one jack handle extension. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension. Attach the jack handle to the jack (A). Position the jack on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground. Front Position – 2500 Models Rear Position – 1500 Models 5-94[...]

  • Страница 495

    Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (B) and both jack handle extensions (C). Attach the wheel wrench (D) to the jack handle extensions (C). Attach the jack handle (B) to the jack (A). Use the jacking pad provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench (D) clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough off the ground so there is enough room for the spare tire to clear the ground. { CAUTION: Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack, you could be badly injured or killed. Never get under a vehicle when it is supported only by a jack. { CAUTION: Raising your vehi[...]

  • Страница 496

    5. Remove all of the wheel nuts. 6. Take off the flat tire. 7. Remove any rust or dirt from the wheel bolts, mounting surfaces, and spare wheel. 5-96[...]

  • Страница 497

    { CAUTION: Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts become loose after time. The wheel could come off and cause an accident. When changing a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle. In an emergency, use a cloth or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-86 . 8. Put the wheel nuts back on with the rounded end of the nuts toward the wheel after mounting the spare tire. { CAUTION: Never use oil or grease on bolts or nuts because the nuts might come loose. The vehicle’s wheel could fall off, ca[...]

  • Страница 498

    10. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the vehicle. Lower the jack completely. 11. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise. { CAUTION: Wheel nuts that are improperly or incorrectly tightened can cause the wheels to become loose or come off. The wheel nuts should be tightened with a torque wrench to the proper torque specification CAUTION: (Continued) CAUTION: (Continued) after replacing. Follow the torque specification supplied by the aftermarket manufacturer when using accessory locking wheel nuts. See Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 for original equipment wheel nut torque specifications. Notice: Improperl[...]

  • Страница 499

    Secondary Latch System Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist assembly equipped with a secondary latch system. It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102 . { CAUTION: Before beginning this procedure read all the instructions. Failure to read and follow the instructions could damage the hoist assembly and you and others could get hurt. Read and follow the instructions listed next. To release the spare tire from the secondary latch: 1. Check under the vehicle to see if the cable end is visible. If t[...]

  • Страница 500

    4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-87 . 5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches (15 cm) of cable is exposed. 6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends, with the backs facing each other. 7. Place the bottom edge of the jack (A) on the wheel blocks (B), separating them so that the jack is balanced securely. 8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the rear bumper. 5-100[...]

  • Страница 501

    9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the center of the spare tire. 10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until it lifts the end fitting. 11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops moving upward and is held firmly in place. The secondary latch has released and the spare tire is balancing on the jack. 12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging by the cable. { CAUTION: Someone standing too close during the procedure could be injured by the jack. If the spare tire does not slide off the jack completely, make sure no one is behind you or on either side of yo[...]

  • Страница 502

    Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools { CAUTION: Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in the passenger compartment of the vehicle could cause injury. In a sudden stop or collision, loose equipment could strike someone. Store all these in the proper place. Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire under your vehicle for an extended period of time or with the valve stem pointing up can damage the wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired as soon as possible. Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare tire carrier. Refer to the following graphics and instructions to help you: A. Hoist Assembly B. Hoist Shaft C[...]

  • Страница 503

    1. Put the tire (H) on the ground at the rear of the vehicle with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear. 2. Tilt the tire toward the vehicle. Separate the tire/wheel retainer (G) from the guide pin. Pull the pin through the center of the wheel. Tilt the retainer down through the center wheel opening. Make sure the retainer is fully seated across the underside of the wheel. 3. Assemble the two jack handle extensions (D) and wheel wrench (E) as shown. 5-103[...]

  • Страница 504

    4. Insert the open end of the extension (J) through the hole in the rear bumper (I) (hoist shaft access hole). 5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the retainer is seated in the wheel opening. 6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot overtighten the cable. 7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A), and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves, use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable. 8. Reinstall the spare tire lock. 9. Reinstall the hoist shaft access cover. 5-104[...]

  • Страница 505

    To store the tools, do the following: A. Wheel Blocks B. Tool Bag with Jack Tools C. Retaining Bracket D. Wing Nut Retaining Tool Bag E. Jack F. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel Blocks G. Jack Knob 1. Return the tools (wheel wrench, jack handle, and jack handle extensions) to the tool bag (B). 2. Assemble wheel blocks (A) and jack (E) together with the wing nut (F). 3. Position the jack (E) and wheel blocks (A) in the driver’s side trim panel over the wheelhouse. 4. Turn the jack knob (G) clockwise until the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in the mounting bracket. 5. Use the retaining bracket (C) to fasten the tool b[...]

  • Страница 506

    Spare Tire Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire. A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-70 and Loading the Vehicle on page 4-33 for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-92 and Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-102 . Notice: If the vehicle has four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is installed on the vehicle, do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced.[...]

  • Страница 507

    Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments that transfer color to home furnishings may also transfer color to the vehicle’s interior. When cleaning the vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned. Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray, apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth. Notice: Using abrasive cleaners when cleaning glass surfaces on the vehicle, could scratch the glass and/or cause damage to the r[...]

  • Страница 508

    Fabric/Carpet Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats. For any soil, always try to remove it first with plain water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove as much of the soil as possible using one of the following techniques: • For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the paper towel until no more can be removed. • For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible and then vacuum. To clean: 1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water or club soda. 2. Wring the cl[...]

  • Страница 509

    Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic Surfaces A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may permanently change the appearance and feel of the interior and are not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based products, or those containing organic solvents to clean the vehicle’s interior because they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform manner. Some[...]

  • Страница 510

    Washing Your Vehicle The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to keep it clean by washing it often. Notice: Certain cleaners contain chemicals that can damage the emblems or nameplates on the vehicle. Check the cleaning product label. If it states that it should not be used on plastic parts, do not use it on the vehicle or damage may occur and it would not be covered by the warranty. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight. Use a car washing soap. Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based or that contain acid or abrasives, as they can damage the paint, metal or plastic on the vehicle. Approved cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Follow all man[...]

  • Страница 511

    Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on the vehicle. Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’s finish if they remain on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove foreign matter. Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather and chemical fallout that can take their toll [...]

  • Страница 512

    Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels and Trim The vehicle may have either aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then be applied. Notice: Chrome wheels and other chrome trim may be damaged if the vehicle is not washed after driving on roads that have been sprayed with magnesium, calcium or sodium chloride. These chlorides are used on roads for conditions such as ice and dust. Always wash the vehicle’s chrome with soap and water after exposure. Notice: Using strong soaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners that con[...]

  • Страница 513

    Sheet Metal Damage If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or replaced to restore corrosion protection. Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide the corrosion protection while maintaining the vehicle warranty. Finish Damage Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal will corrode quickly and may develop into major repair expense. Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with touch-up materials available from your dealer/retailer. Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected in your dealer’s/retailer’s [...]

  • Страница 514

    Vehicle Identification Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) This is the legal identifier for the vehicle. It appears on a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on the driver side. It can be seen through the windshield from outside the vehicle. The VIN also appears on the Certification/Tire and Service Parts labels and the certificates of title and registration. Engine Identification The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code. This code helps identify the vehicle’s engine, specifications, and replacement parts. See “Engine Specifications” under Capacities and Specifications on page 5-122 for the vehicle’s engine code. Service Parts Identification Label Th[...]

  • Страница 515

    The vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting to add anything electrical to the vehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-96 . Windshield Wiper Fuses The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed. Power Windows and Other Power Options Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other power accessories. If the current load is too heavy, the circuit breaker opens and then closes after a cool down period, protecting the circuit until the proble[...]

  • Страница 516

    Instrument Panel Fuse Block The instrument panel fuse block access door is located on the driver side edge of the instrument panel. Pull off the cover to access the fuse block. The vehicle may not use all of the fuses shown. Fuses Usage 1 Rear Seats 2 Rear Accessory Power Outlet 3 Steering Wheel Controls Backlight 5-116[...]

  • Страница 517

    Fuses Usage 4 Driver Door Module 5 Dome Lamps, Driver Side Turn Signal 6 Driver Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 7 Instrument Panel Back Lighting 8 Passenger Side Turn Signal, Stoplamp 9 Passenger Door Module, Driver Unlock 10 Power Door Lock 2 (Unlock Feature) 11 Power Door Lock 2 (Lock Feature) 12 Stoplamps, Center-High Mounted Stoplamp 13 Rear Climate Controls 14 Power Mirror 15 Body Control Module (BCM) 16 Accessory Power Outlets 17 Interior Lamps 18 Power Door Lock 1 (Unlock Feature) 19 Rear Seat Entertainment 20 Ultrasonic Rear Parking Assist, Power Liftgate 21 Power Door Lock 1 (Lock Feature) Fuses Usage 22 Driver Information Center (DIC) 23 Rear Wiper 24 Cooled Seats 25 Driver Seat Module,[...]

  • Страница 518

    Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block The center instrument panel fuse block is located underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the steering column. Top View Harness Connector Usage BODY 2 Body Harness Connector 2 BODY 1 Body Harness Connector 1 BODY 3 Body Harness Connector 3 Harness Connector Usage HEADLINER 3 Headliner Harness Connector 3 HEADLINER 2 Headliner Harness Connector 2 HEADLINER 1 Headliner Harness Connector 1 SEO/UPFITTER Special Equipment Option Upfitter Harness Connector Circuit Breaker Usage CB1 Passenger Side Power Window Circuit Breaker CB2 Passenger Seat Circuit Breaker CB3 Driver Seat Circuit Breaker CB4 Rear Sliding Window 5-118[...]

  • Страница 519

    Underhood Fuse Block The underhood fuse block is located in the engine compartment, on the driver side of the vehicle. Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block. If the vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. Notice: Spilling liquid on any electrical components on the vehicle may damage it. Always keep the covers on any electrical component. To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your thumb and index finger and pull straight out. Fuses Usage 1 Right Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 2 Electronic Stability Suspension Control, Automatic Level Control Exhaust 3 Left Trailer Stop/Turn Lamp 4 Engine Controls 5 Engine Control Module, Throttle Con[...]

  • Страница 520

    Fuses Usage 6 Trailer Brake Controller 7 Front Washer 8 Oxygen Sensors 9 Antilock Brakes System 2 10 Trailer Back-up Lamps 11 Driver Side Low-Beam Headlamp 12 Engine Control Module (Battery) 13 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Right Side) 14 Transmission Control Module (Battery) 15 Vehicle Back-up Lamps 16 Passenger Side Low-Beam Headlamp 17 Air Conditioning Compressor 18 Oxygen Sensors 19 Transmission Controls (Ignition) 20 Fuel Pump 21 Fuel System Control Module 22 Headlamp Washer 23 Rear Windshield Washer 24 Fuel Injectors, Ignition Coils (Left Side) 25 Trailer Park Lamps Fuses Usage 26 Driver Side Park Lamps 27 Passenger Side Park Lamps 28 Fog Lamps 29 Horn 30 Passenger Side High-Beam Hea[...]

  • Страница 521

    Fuses Usage 47 Not Used 48 Auxiliary Climate Control (Ignition) 49 Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) 50 Rear Defogger 51 Heated Mirrors 52 SEO B1 Upfitter Usage (Battery) 53 Cigarette Lighter, Auxiliary Power Outlet 54 Automatic Level Control Compressor Relay 55 Climate Controls (Ignition) 56 Engine Control Module, Secondary Fuel Pump (Ignition) J-Case Fuses Usage 57 Cooling Fan 1 58 Automatic Level Control Compressor 59 Heavy Duty Antilock Braking System 60 Cooling Fan 2 61 Antilock Brake System 1 62 Starter 63 Stud 2 (Trailer Brakes) 64 Left Bussed Electrical Center 1 J-Case Fuses Usage 65 Electric Running Boards 66 Heated Windshield Washer System 67 Transfer Case 68 Stud 1 (Trailer Co[...]

  • Страница 522

    Capacities and Specifications If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information. Application Capacities English Metric Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a For the air conditioning system refrigerant charge amount, see the refrigerant caution label located under the hood. See your dealer/retailer for more information. Cooling System 4.8L V8 17.8 qt 16.9 L 5.3L V8 18.3 qt 17.3 L 6.0L V8 1500 Series 17.9 qt 16.9 L 6.0L V8 2500 Series 17.4 qt 16.5 L 6.2L V8 17.6 qt 16.7 L Engine Oil with Filter 6.0 qt†[...]

  • Страница 523

    Application Capacities English Metric Fuel Tank Regular 26.0 gal 98.4 L Extended 1500 Series 31.5 gal 119.2 L Extended 2500 Series 39.0 gal 147.6 L Transmission Fluid 4L60-E Electronic Transmission 5.0 qt 4.7 L 6L80-E Transmission 6.0 qt 5.7 L 6L90-E Transmission 6.3 qt 6.0 L Transfer Case Fluid 1.6 qt 1.5 L Wheel Nut Torque 140 lb ft 190 Y †Oil filter should be changed at every oil change. All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in this manual. Recheck fluid level after filling. 5-123[...]

  • Страница 524

    Engine Specifications Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap 4.8L V8 C Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Iron Block) 0 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 Flexible Fuel with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) 3 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5.3L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ (Iron Block) J Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 (Iron Block) K Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.0L V8 with Active Fuel Management™ (Aluminum Block) Y Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 6.2L V8 Flexible Fuel (Aluminum Block) 2 Automatic 0.040 in (1.01 mm) 5-124[...]

  • Страница 525

    Maintenance Schedule ..................................... .6-2 Introduction .................................................. .6-2 Maintenance Requirements ............................. .6-2 Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... .6-2 Using the Maintenance Schedule ..................... .6-3 Scheduled Maintenance .................................. .6-4 Additional Required Services ........................... .6-6 Maintenance Footnotes .................................. .6-8 Owner Checks and Services ......................... .6-10 At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... .6-10 At Least Once a Month ................................ .6-10 At Least Once a Year[...]

  • Страница 526

    Maintenance Schedule Introduction Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and change as recommended. Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? The Plan supplements the vehicle warranties. See the Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet or your dealer/retailer for details. Maintenance Requirements Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections, replacement parts, and recommended fluids and lubricants as prescribed in this manual are necessary to keep this vehicle in good working condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow scheduled maintenance might not be covered by the vehicle warranty. Your Vehicle and the Environment Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep the v[...]

  • Страница 527

    Using the Maintenance Schedule We want to help keep this vehicle in good working condition. But we do not know exactly how you will drive it. You might drive very short distances only a few times a week. Or you might drive long distances all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You might use the vehicle in making deliveries. Or you might drive it to work, to do errands, or in many other ways. Because of all the different ways people use their vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You might need more frequent checks and replacements. So please read the following and note how you drive. If you have any questions on how to keep the vehicle in good condition, see your dealer/retailer. This schedule [...]

  • Страница 528

    Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 tells what should be checked, when to check it, and what can easily be done to help keep the vehicle in good condition. The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 and Maintenance Replacement Parts on page 6-15 . When the vehicle is serviced, make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of genuine parts from your dealer/retailer. Scheduled Maintenance When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON message displays, service is required for the vehicle. Have the vehicle serviced as soon [...]

  • Страница 529

    Scheduled Maintenance Service Maintenance I Maintenance II Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 . Reset oil life system. See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 . An Emission Control Service. •• Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #. •• Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j). •• Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary, replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 . See footnote (l). • Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on page 5-76 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month on page 6-10 . •• Inspect brake s[...]

  • Страница 530

    Additional Required Services The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service ( I or II ) after the indicated miles (kilometers) shown for each item. Additional Required Services Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Inspect fuel system for damage or leaks. • • ••• • Inspect exhaust system for loose or damaged components. • • ••• • Vehicles without a filter restriction indicator: Replace engine air cleaner filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20 . ••• Change automatic transmission fluid and filter (severe service). See footno[...]

  • Страница 531

    Additional Required Services (cont’d) Service and Miles (Kilometers) 25,000 (40 000) 50,000 (80 000) 75,000 (120 000) 100,000 (160 000) 125,000 (200 000) 150,000 (240 000) Four-wheel drive: Change transfer case fluid (normal service). See footnote (g). • Inspect evaporative control system. An Emission Control Service. See footnotes † and (k). ••• Replace spark plugs and inspect spark plug wires. An Emission Control Service. • Engine cooling system service (or every five years, whichever occurs first). An Emission Control Service. See footnote (i). • Inspect engine accessory drive belt. An Emission Control Service. See footnote (m). • 6-7[...]

  • Страница 532

    Maintenance Footnotes † The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the California Air Resources Board has determined that the failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however, urge that all recommended maintenance services be performed at the indicated intervals and the maintenance be recorded. # Lubricate the front suspension, steering linkage, and parking brake cable guides. Control arm ball joints on 2500 series vehicles require lubrication but should not be lubricated unless their temperature is 10°F ( − 12°C) or higher, or they could be damaged. Control arm[...]

  • Страница 533

    (f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt, fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and folding seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be required when exposed to a corrosive environment. Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. (g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and proper installation. Check to be sure vent hose is unobstructed, clear, and free of debris. During any maintenanc[...]

  • Страница 534

    Owner Checks and Services These owner checks and services should be performed at the intervals specified to help ensure vehicle safety, dependability, and emission control performance. Your dealer/retailer can assist with these checks and services. Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to the vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13 . At Each Fuel Fill It is important to perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill. Engine Oil Level Check Notice: It is important to check the engine oil regularly and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep the engine oil at the[...]

  • Страница 535

    At Least Once a Year Starter Switch Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this inspection, the vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle moves, you or others could be injured. 1. Before starting this check, be sure there is enough room around the vehicle. 2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-45 . Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready to turn off the engine immediately if it starts. 3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle should start only in P (Park) or N (Neutral). If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact your dealer/retailer for service. Automatic Transmission Shift Lock Control System Check { CAUTION: W[...]

  • Страница 536

    Ignition Transmission Lock Check While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF in each shift lever position. • The ignition should turn to LOCK/OFF only when the shift lever is in P (Park). • The ignition key should come out only in LOCK/OFF. Contact your dealer/retailer if service is required. Parking Brake and Automatic Transmission P (Park) Mechanism Check { CAUTION: When you are doing this check, the vehicle could begin to move. You or others could be injured and property could be damaged. Make sure there is room in front of the vehicle in case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the regular brake at once should the vehicle begin to move. Park on[...]

  • Страница 537

    Recommended Fluids and Lubricants Fluids and lubricants identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Engine Oil Engine oil which meets GM Standard GM6094M and displays the American Petroleum Institute Certified for Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. To determine the proper viscosity for your vehicle’s engine, see Engine Oil on page 5-15 . Engine Coolant 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL ® Coolant. See Engine Coolant on page 5-29 . Hydraulic Brake System DOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. U.S. 12377967, in Canada 89021320). Windshield Washer Optikleen ® Washer Solvent. Usage Fl[...]

  • Страница 538

    Usage Fluid/Lubricant Rear Axle SAE 75W-90 Synthetic Axle Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 89021677, in Canada 89021678) meeting GM Specification 9986115. Transfer Case (Four-Wheel Drive) DEXRON ® -VI Automatic Transmission Fluid. Front Axle Propshaft Spline or One-Piece Propshaft Spline (Two-Wheel Drive with Auto. Trans.) Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant (GM Part No. U.S. 12345879, in Canada 10953511) or lubricant meeting requirements of GM 9985830. Usage Fluid/Lubricant Hood Hinges Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Outer Tailgate Handle Pivot Points Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in Canada 10953474). Weathers[...]

  • Страница 539

    Maintenance Replacement Parts Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer/retailer. Maintenance Replacement Parts Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number Engine Air Cleaner/Filter Standard Filter 15908916* A3086C* High Capacity Filter 15908915 A3085C Oil Filter 89017524 PF48 Spark Plugs 12609877 41-985 Wiper Blades Front – 21.6 in (55.0 cm) 25877402 — Rear – 11.8 in (30.0 cm) 25820122 — *15908915 (A3085C) high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted. 6-15[...]

  • Страница 540

    Engine Drive Belt Routing If your vehicle is a Two-mode Hybrid, see the Two-mode Hybrid manual for more information. 6-16[...]

  • Страница 541

    Maintenance Record After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2 . Any additional information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-10 can be added on the following record pages. You should retain all maintenance receipts. Maintenance Record Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-17[...]

  • Страница 542

    Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-18[...]

  • Страница 543

    Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-19[...]

  • Страница 544

    Maintenance Record (cont’d) Date Odometer Reading Serviced By Maintenance I or Maintenance II Services Performed 6-20[...]

  • Страница 545

    Customer Assistance and Information .............. .7-2 Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... .7-2 Online Owner Center ..................................... .7-5 Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users .............................................. .7-6 Customer Assistance Off ices ........................... .7-6 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... .7-7 Roadside Assistance Program ......................... .7-7 Scheduling Service Appointments ................... .7-10 Courtesy Transportation Program ................... .7-10 Collision Damage Repair ............................... .7-11 Reporting Safety Defects ............................... .7-14 Re[...]

  • Страница 546

    Customer Assistance and Information Customer Satisfaction Procedure Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to your dealer and to Chevrolet. Normally, any concerns with the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle will be resolved by the dealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your satisfaction, the following steps should be taken: STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of dealership management. Normally, concerns can be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has already been reviewed with the sales, service, or parts manager, con[...]

  • Страница 547

    STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both General Motors and your dealer are committed to making sure you are completely satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure outlined in Steps One and Two, you can file with the Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto Line Program to enforce your rights. The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court program administered by the Council of Better Business Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to filing a court action, use of the p[...]

  • Страница 548

    STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the event that you do not feel your concerns have been addressed after following the procedure outlined in Steps 1 and 2, General Motors of Canada Limited wants you to be aware of its participation in a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program. General Motors of Canada Limited has committed to binding arbitration of owner disputes involving factory-related vehicle service claims. The program provides for the review of the facts involved by an impartial third party arbiter, and may include an informal hearing before the arbiter. The program is designed so that the entire dispute settlement process, from the time you file your complaint to the final decision[...]

  • Страница 549

    Online Owner Center Online Owner Center (U.S.) — www.gmownercenter.com/chevrolet Information and services customized for your specific vehicle — all in one convenient place. • Digital owner manual, warranty information, and more • Online service and maintenance records • Find Chevrolet dealers for service nationwide • Exclusive privileges and offers • Recall notices for your specific vehicle • OnStar ® and GM Cardmember Services Earnings summaries Other Helpful Links: Chevrolet — www.chevrolet.com Chevrolet Merchandise — www.chevymall.com Help Center — www.chevrolet.com/helpcenter • FAQ • Contact Us My GM Canada (Canada) — www.gm.ca My GM Canada is a password-p[...]

  • Страница 550

    Customer Assistance for Text Telephone (TTY) Users To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or speech-impaired and who use Text Telephones (TTYs), Chevrolet has TTY equipment available at its Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate with Chevrolet by dialing: 1-800-833-CHEV (2438). (TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.) Customer Assistance Of fices Chevrolet encourages customers to call the toll-free number for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to write or e-mail Chevrolet, the letter should be addressed to: United States — Customer Assistance Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232[...]

  • Страница 551

    Mexico, Central America and Caribbean Islands/Countries (Except Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands) — Customer Assistance General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V. Customer Assistance Center Paseo de la Reforma # 2740 Col. Lomas de Bezares C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F. 01-800-508-0000 Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800 GM Mobility Reimbursement Program This program, available to qualified applicants, can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle, such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift. The offer is available for a very limited period of time from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more details, or to determin[...]

  • Страница 552

    • Model, year, color, and license plate number of the vehicle • Odometer reading, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle • Description of the problem Coverage Services are provided up to 5 years/100,000 miles (160 000 km), whichever comes first. In the U.S., anyone driving the vehicle is covered. In Canada, a person driving the vehicle without permission from the owner is not covered. Roadside Assistance is not a part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Chevrolet and General Motors of Canada Limited reserve the right to make any changes or discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any time without notification. Chevrolet and General Motors of Can[...]

  • Страница 553

    Services Not Included in Roadside Assistance • Impound towing caused by violation of any laws. • Legal fines. • Mounting, dismounting or changing of snow tires, chains, or other traction devices. • Towing or services for vehicles driven on a non-public road or highway. Services Specific to Canadian Purchased Vehicles • Fuel delivery: Reimbursement is approximately $5 Canadian. Diesel fuel delivery may be restricted. Propane and other fuels are not provided through this service. • Lock-Out Service: Vehicle registration is required. • Trip Routing Service: Detailed maps of North America are provided when requested either with the most direct route or the most scenic route. Ther[...]

  • Страница 554

    Scheduling Service Appointments When your vehicle requires warranty service, contact your dealer/retailer and request an appointment. By scheduling a service appointment and advising your service consultant of your transportation needs, your dealer/retailer can help minimize your inconvenience. If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service department immediately, keep driving it until it can be scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership/retailer, let them know this, and ask for instructions. If the dealer/retailer requests you to bring the vehicle for service, you are urged to do so as early in the work day as possibl[...]

  • Страница 555

    Public Transportation or Fuel Reimbursement If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs, and public transportation is used instead of the dealer’s shuttle service, the expense must be supported by original receipts and can only be up to the maximum amount allowed by GM for shuttle service. In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrange transportation through a friend or relative, limited reimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses may be available. Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be supported by original receipts. See your dealer for information regarding the allowance amounts for reimbursement of fuel or other transportation costs. Courtesy Rental Vehicle Your d[...]

  • Страница 556

    Collision Parts Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with the same materials and construction methods as the parts with which your vehicle was originally built. Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice to ensure that your vehicle’s designed appearance, durability, and safety are preserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty. Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles that were total losses in prior crashes. In most cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain [...]

  • Страница 557

    If a Crash Occurs Here is what to do if you are involved in a crash. • Check to make sure that you are all right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured. • If there has been an injury, call emergency services for help. Do not leave the scene of a crash until all matters have been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its position puts you in danger or you are instructed to move it by a police off icer. • Give only the necessary and requested information to police and other parties involved in the crash. Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame of mind, or anything unrelated to the crash. This will help guard aga[...]

  • Страница 558

    Managing the Vehicle Damage Repair Process In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs, GM recommends that you take an active role in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there. Specify to the facility that any required replacement collision parts be original equipment parts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts. Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by your GM vehicle warranty. Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits, your insurance company may initially value the repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with y[...]

  • Страница 559

    Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian Government If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, notify Transport Canada immediately, in addition to notifying General Motors of Canada Limited. Call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to: Transport Canada Road Safety Branch 2780 Sheff ield Road Ottawa, Ontario K1B 3V9 Reporting Safety Defects to General Motors In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada) in a situation like this, please notify General Motors. Call 1-800-222-1020, or write: Chevrolet Motor Division Chevrolet Customer Assistance Center P.O. Box 33170 Detroit, MI 48232-5170 In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777 (English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French), [...]

  • Страница 560

    Current and Past Model Order Forms Technical Service Bulletins and Manuals are available for current and past model GM vehicles. To request an order form, specify year and model name of the vehicle. ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123 Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time For Credit Card Orders Only (VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. on the World Wide Web at: helminc.com Or you can write to: Helm, Incorporated P.O. Box 07130 Detroit, MI 48207 Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery. Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make checks payable in U.S. funds[...]

  • Страница 561

    Event Data Recorders This vehicle has an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an airbag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: • How various systems in your vehicle were operating • Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened • How far, if at all, the driver was pressing the accelerator and/or brake[...]

  • Страница 562

    OnStar ® If your vehicle has OnStar and you subscribe to the OnStar services, please refer to the OnStar Terms and Conditions for information on data collection and use. See also OnStar ® System on page 2-68 in this manual for more information. Navigation System If your vehicle has a navigation system, use of the system may result in the storage of destinations, addresses, telephone numbers, and other trip information. Refer to the navigation system operating manual for information on stored data and for deletion instructions. Radio Frequency Identification (RFID) RFID technology is used in some vehicles for functions such as tire pressure monitoring and ignition system security, as well [...]

  • Страница 563

    A Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5 - 3 Accessory Power ............................................ 2-28 Accessory Power Outlets ................................. 3-20 Active Fuel Management™ ............................... 2-31 Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-39 Additional Required Services, Scheduled Maintenance ................................................. 6 - 6 Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5 - 6 Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-114 Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-30 Air Cleaner/Filter , Engine ................................. 5-20 Air Conditioning[...]

  • Страница 564

    Appearance Care (cont.) W ashing Y our V ehicle ................................. 5-110 Weatherstrips ............................................ 5-109 Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-111 Ashtray ......................................................... 3-21 Assistance Program, Roadside ........................... 7 - 7 Audio System ................................................. 3-83 Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-138 Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation Manual ................................................. 3-115 Setting the Clock ......................................... 3-84 XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-140 Audio System[...]

  • Страница 565

    C Calibration ..................................................... 3-61 California Perchlorate Materials Requirements ................. 5 - 4 W arning ....................................................... 5 - 4 California Fuel .................................................. 5 - 6 Camera, Rear Vision ....................................... 2-62 Canadian Owners ............................................... ii i Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-122 Carbon Monoxide ................................... 2-13, 2-15 Engine Exhaust ........................................... 2-50 Winter Driving ............................................. 4-29 Care of Safety Belts .[...]

  • Страница 566

    Climate Control System ................................... 3-22 Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-24 Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-30 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-31 Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System, Electronic ................................................ 3-32 Clock, Setting ................................................. 3-84 Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11 Compass ....................................................... 3-61 Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-22 Control of a V ehicle .......................................... 4 - 3 Coolant[...]

  • Страница 567

    Driving (cont.) Defensive ..................................................... 4 - 2 Drunk .......................................................... 4 - 3 Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 4-27 Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-28 In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-26 Loss of Control ........................................... 4-11 O f f - R o a d .................................................... 4-13 Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 4-11 Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-32 Rocking Y our V ehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-32 Winter ................................[...]

  • Страница 568

    F Filter Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20 Finish Damage ............................................. 5-113 Flashers, Hazard W arning .................................. 3 - 6 Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3 - 8 Flat T ire ........................................................ 5-85 Flat T ire, Changing ......................................... 5-86 Flat T ire, Storing ........................................... 5-102 Fluid Automatic T ransmission ........................ 5-22, 5-25 Power Steering ........................................... 5-38 Windshield W asher ...................................... 5-39 Fog Lamps Bulb Repl[...]

  • Страница 569

    H Halogen Bulbs ................................................ 5-56 Hazard W arning Flashers ................................... 3 - 6 Head Restraints ............................................... 1 - 2 Headlamps A i m i n g ....................................................... 5-53 Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-56 Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ..................... 3-16 Exterior Lamps ............................................ 3-14 Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3 - 8 High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3 - 8 On Reminder .............................................. 3-15 Heated Seats ......................[...]

  • Страница 570

    L Labeling, Tire Sidewall ..................................... 5-62 Lamps Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................ 3-18 Daytime Running (DRL) ................................ 3-16 D o m e ........................................................ 3-18 Dome Lamp Override ................................... 3-19 License Plate .............................................. 5-58 Malfunction Indicator .................................... 3-43 Reading ..................................................... 3-19 L a p B e l t ........................................................ 1-52 Lap-Shoulder Belt ........................................... 1-45 LA TCH System for Child Restraints ..[...]

  • Страница 571

    M Maintenance Footnotes ..................................................... 6 - 8 Schedule, Additional Required Services ............ 6 - 6 Maintenance Schedule At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10 At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10 At Least Once a Y ear .................................. 6-11 Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17 Maintenance Replacement Parts .................... 6-15 Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6 - 2 Owner Checks and Services ......................... 6-10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13 Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6 - 4 [...]

  • Страница 572

    O Object Detection, Side Blind Zone Alert (SBZA) ............................................... 2-58 Odometer ...................................................... 3-36 T r i p ........................................................... 3-36 O f f - R o a d ....................................................... 4-13 Driving ....................................................... 4-13 Recovery .................................................... 4-11 Oil Engine ....................................................... 5-15 Engine Oil Life System ................................. 5-18 Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-46 Pressure Light ..............................[...]

  • Страница 573

    Phone Bluetooth ® ................................................ 3-115 Power Door Locks ................................................. 2-10 Electrical System ....................................... 5-115 Liftgate ...................................................... 2-15 Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1 - 6 Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-28 S e a t ............................................................ 1 - 5 Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-38 Windows .................................................... 2-20 Power Assist Steps ......................................... 2-18 Pregnancy , Using Safet[...]

  • Страница 574

    Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-127 Rear Side Window Antenna ............................ 3-140 Rear Storage ................................................. 2-80 Rear Vision Camera (R VC) .............................. 2-62 Rear Window W asher/Wiper ............................. 3-11 Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-52 Automatic Dimming ...................................... 2-52 Reclining Seatbacks ........................................ 1-10 Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13 Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-32 Recreational V ehicle T owing ............................. 4-43 Reimbu[...]

  • Страница 575

    Seats 60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-14 Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-20 Center Seat ................................................ 1-13 Head Restraints ............................................ 1 - 2 Heated and Cooled Seats .............................. 1 - 8 Heated Seats ............................................... 1 - 7 Heated Seats - Rear .................................... 1-14 Manual Lumbar ............................................. 1 - 6 Memory , Mirrors and Pedals ........................... 1 - 8 P o w e r L u m b a r .............................................. 1 - 6 Power Seats ...............................[...]

  • Страница 576

    Storage Areas (cont.) Luggage Carrier .......................................... 2-79 R e a r .......................................................... 2-80 Rear Seat Armrest ....................................... 2-80 Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ..................... 4-31 Sun Visors ..................................................... 2-21 Sunroof ......................................................... 2-81 T T achometer .................................................... 3-36 T aillamps T urn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps .... 5-57 T ext T elephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7 - 6 Theft-Deterrent Feature .................................. 3-138 Theft-Deter[...]

  • Страница 577

    Tires (cont.) Wheel Alignment and T ire Balance ................. 5-82 Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-82 When It Is T ime for New T ires ...................... 5-77 T o w / H a u l M o d e ............................................... 2-38 T ow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-49 T owing Recreational V ehicle ..................................... 4-43 T owing a Trailer .......................................... 4-50 T railer Recommendations .............................. 4-72 Y our V ehicle ............................................... 4-43 T raction StabiliT rak ® System ....................................... 4 - 6 T railer T owing R[...]

  • Страница 578

    W W arning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............... 3-34 W arnings DIC W arnings and Messages ........................ 3-64 Hazard Flashers ............................................ 3 - 6 Safety and Symbols ......................................... i v Wheels Alignment and T ire Balance .......................... 5-82 Different Size .............................................. 5-80 Replacement ............................................... 5-82 When It Is T ime for New T ires .......................... 5-77 Where to Put the Child Restraint ....................... 1-63 Windows ....................................................... 2-19 P o w e r ...................................[...]